March 2015
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
MKX
Litho in U.S.A.
Owner’s Manual
2016 MKX
2016 MKX Owner’s Manual
lincolnowner.com lincolncanada.com
GA1J 19A321 AA
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design
or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any
form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20150223195445
Introduction
About This Manual............................................7
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65................................11
Perchlorate........................................................12
Lincoln Automotive Financial
Services.........................................................12
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Special Notices.................................................13
Mobile Communications Equipment...........14
Export Unique Options...................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment..........................15
Child Safety
General Information........................................16
Installing Child Seats......................................18
Booster Seats...................................................27
Child Seat Positioning...................................29
Child Safety Locks...........................................31
Safety Belts
Principle of Operation....................................33
Fastening the Safety Belts...........................34
Safety Belt Height Adjustment....................38
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime............................................................39
Safety Belt Minder..........................................40
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance.................................................41
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..............................43
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation....................................44
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................45
Front Passenger Sensing System..............46
Side Airbags.....................................................50
Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags..........51
Safety Canopy™................................................51
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........52
Airbag Disposal...............................................54
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.................................................55
Remote Control...............................................56
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control..........................................................59
MyKey™
Principle of Operation...................................60
Creating a MyKey............................................61
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................62
Checking MyKey System Status.................64
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems........................................................65
MyKey Troubleshooting................................65
Locks
Locking and Unlocking..................................67
Manual Liftgate.................................................71
Power Liftgate..................................................73
Keyless Entry....................................................76
1
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Table of Contents
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System............................80
Anti-Theft Alarm...............................................81
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column..........................................................83
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column..........................................................83
Audio Control...................................................84
Voice Control...................................................85
Cruise Control.................................................85
Information Display Control.........................85
Heated Steering Wheel................................86
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers..........................................87
Autowipers.......................................................88
Windshield Washers......................................89
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............89
Lighting
General Information........................................91
Lighting Control................................................91
Autolamps........................................................92
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................93
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................94
Daytime Running Lamps...............................94
Automatic High Beam Control....................95
Adaptive Headlamps.....................................96
Direction Indicators........................................97
Welcome Lighting...........................................97
Interior Lamps..................................................97
Ambient Lighting............................................99
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows.............................................100
Global Opening and Closing.......................101
Exterior Mirrors...............................................101
Interior Mirror.................................................104
Sun Visors.......................................................105
Moonroof.........................................................105
Instrument Cluster
Gauges.............................................................107
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................109
Audible Warnings and Indicators...............113
Information Displays
General Information.......................................114
Information Messages..................................121
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control.........................140
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................142
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................143
Cabin Air Filter...............................................143
Remote Start...................................................144
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position....................145
Head Restraints.............................................145
Power Seats....................................................148
Memory Function...........................................151
Rear Seats.......................................................153
2
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Table of Contents
Heated Seats..................................................154
Climate Controlled Seats............................155
Rear Seat Armrest.........................................157
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener................158
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.................................163
Storage Compartments
Glove Box........................................................165
Center Console.............................................165
Overhead Console.......................................166
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information......................................167
Keyless Starting.............................................167
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................168
Engine Block Heater......................................171
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions........................................173
Fuel Quality.....................................................174
Fuel Filler Funnel Location..........................175
Running Out of Fuel......................................175
Refueling..........................................................176
Fuel Consumption.........................................178
Emission Control System.............................179
Transmission
Automatic Transmission..............................182
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive..................................188
Brakes
General Information......................................194
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..........................................................194
Electric Parking Brake..................................195
Auto Hold........................................................197
Traction Control
Principle of Operation.................................200
Using Traction Control................................200
Stability Control
Principle of Operation.................................202
Using Stability Control................................204
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation.................................205
Rear Parking Aid...........................................206
Front Parking Aid.........................................206
Side Sensing System...................................207
Active Park Assist........................................209
Rear View Camera........................................217
360 Degree Parking Aid Camera............220
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................223
Using Cruise Control...................................223
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................224
3
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Table of Contents
Driving Aids
Driver Alert......................................................231
Lane Keeping System.................................232
Blind Spot Information System..................237
Steering..........................................................242
Pre-Collision Assist......................................243
Drive Control.................................................246
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................249
Cargo Nets.....................................................249
Luggage Covers...........................................250
Roof Racks and Load Carriers...................251
Load Limit........................................................251
Towing
Towing a Trailer..............................................261
Trailer Sway Control....................................262
Recommended Towing Weights..............262
Essential Towing Checks............................264
Transporting the Vehicle............................266
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........267
Driving Hints
Breaking-In....................................................269
Reduced Engine Performance..................269
Economical Driving......................................269
Driving Through Water................................270
Floor Mats........................................................271
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................272
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................273
Fuel Shutoff....................................................273
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................274
Post-Crash Alert System.............................276
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need.................277
In California (U.S. Only)...............................278
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................279
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)...........................................280
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.......................................................280
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................282
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......282
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)............................................................283
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart............................284
Changing a Fuse...........................................301
Maintenance
General Information.....................................302
Opening and Closing the Hood...............302
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoost™..................................................304
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L....................306
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.7L EcoBoost™......307
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L...........................308
Engine Oil Check.........................................308
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................309
Engine Coolant Check................................309
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check.......313
Brake Fluid Check.........................................315
Washer Fluid Check......................................315
4
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Table of Contents
Fuel Filter.........................................................316
Changing the 12V Battery...........................316
Checking the Wiper Blades........................318
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................318
Adjusting the Headlamps............................319
Changing a Bulb............................................321
Bulb Specification Chart.............................322
Changing the Engine Air Filter..................324
Vehicle Care
General Information.....................................325
Cleaning Products........................................325
Cleaning the Exterior..................................325
Waxing............................................................326
Cleaning the Engine....................................327
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades.........................................................327
Cleaning the Interior....................................328
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.........................330
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................330
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..................331
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels..........................331
Vehicle Storage............................................332
Wheels and Tires
General Information.....................................334
Temporary Mobility Kit................................336
Tire Care.........................................................342
Using Summer Tires....................................358
Using Snow Chains......................................358
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............359
Changing a Road Wheel.............................363
Technical Specifications.............................368
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™..................................................370
Engine Specifications - 3.7L........................371
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™............372
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L.................................373
Vehicle Identification Number...................374
Vehicle Certification Label.........................374
Transmission Code Designation...............375
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™..................................................376
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.........381
Audio System
General Information.....................................388
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD.........................................................389
Media Hub.......................................................391
MyLincoln Touch™
General Information.....................................392
Settings...........................................................403
Entertainment................................................422
Phone..............................................................445
Information.....................................................455
Climate............................................................469
Navigation......................................................473
MyLincoln Touch™ Troubleshooting.........486
Accessories
Accessories...................................................494
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................496
5
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Table of Contents
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information...........499
Normal Scheduled Maintenance.............503
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................507
Scheduled Maintenance Record................511
Appendices
End User License Agreement...................522
6
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Table of Contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about it, the greater
the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to your
vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different
models, so may appear different to you on
your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
7
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Introduction
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
8
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Introduction
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company, Ford of
Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle
diagnostic information received through a
direct connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
9
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Introduction
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company, Ford
of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for
vehicle improvement purposes. For U.S. only
(if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that
certain diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic information
may be used for any purpose. See
MyLincoln Touch™ (page 392).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford
of Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
10
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Introduction
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details
about the vehicle or crash or personal
information about the occupants to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature. See
MyLincoln Touch™ (page 392).
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped,
U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology
and advanced vehicle sensors to collect
the vehicle’s current location, travel
direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with
the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches that you request. If you do not
want Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the service. For
more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions.
See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 392).
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine exhaust,
certain vehicle components, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
11
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Introduction
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, safety belt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
Use the options below to contact us with
questions about your account or financing
and we will respond promptly:
Web Address
www.LincolnAFS.com
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
P.O. Box 542000
Omaha, NE 68154-8000
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’ s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.
12
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Introduction
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate these parts deliver the intended
level of protection as a whole system. A great
way to know for sure you are getting this
level of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Lincoln Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Lincoln Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and conditions
of the Lincoln Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not follow
the instruction highlighted by the warning
symbol. Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could result in
personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
system has a data port for diagnostics, repair
and reprogramming services with diagnostic
scan tools. Installing a non-Ford-approved
aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use
of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty may
not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-in
device.
13
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Introduction
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for Export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
14
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Introduction
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
15
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is secured
properly in a device that is appropriate
for their height, age and weight. Child safety
restraints must be bought separately from
your vehicle. Failure to follow these
instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
WARNINGS
All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints
are based on probable child height, age and
weight thresholds from National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. Ford recommends
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed in
your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll
free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check
with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST or for further information,
contact your provincial ministry of
WARNINGS
transportation, locate your local St. John
Ambulance office by searching for St. John
Ambulance on the internet, or Transport
Canada at 1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made
especially for their height, age, and weight
may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days,
the temperature in the trunk or vehicle
interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of
people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries,
including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
16
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Infants or toddlers
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt
snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seat back upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft.
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
17
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80
pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position. See Front Passenger
Sensing System (page 46).
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
18
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child seat and
the release button, to prevent accidental
unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child seat with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a
forward facing child seat, the steps are the
same for installing a rear facing child seat.
Standard safety belts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, pull down on
the shoulder belt and then grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
19
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that will exist once the extra weight of
20
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
the child is added to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will provide extra help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 centimeters) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a
Certified Passenger Seat Technician.
Inflatable safety belts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E146522
21
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable safety belt and pull upward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard safety belt, the
inflatable safety belt's unique lap portion
locks the child seat for installation. The
ability for the shoulder portion of the belt to
move freely is normal, even after the lap belt
has been put into the automatic locking
mode.
22
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable safety belt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with safety belt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that will exist once the extra weight of
the child is added to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 centimeters) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a
Certified Passenger Seat Technician.
23
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats to
the same anchor. In a collision, one
anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may
break, causing serious injury or death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the seatback and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use safety belts to
attach the child seat, however the safety belt
can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child seat.
E142535
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating positions
marked with the child seat symbol.
E196697
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the cushion
and seat back below the symbols as shown.
Follow the child seat manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child seat
with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
seat only to the anchors shown.
24
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating
Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center seating
position unless the child seat manufacturer's
instructions permit and specify using anchors
spaced at least as far apart as those in this
vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 20 inches
(51 centimeters) apart. A child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments cannot be installed at
the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child seats (with attachments on
belt webbing) can only be used at this
seating position provided that the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit use with
the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a
child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent
child seat is attached to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that
the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child seat from side to side and forward
and back where it is secured to your vehicle.
The seat should move less than one inch
when you do this for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety
belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be
attached first, provided a proper installation
is achieved. Attach the tether strap afterward,
if included with the child seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child
safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point
called the top tether anchor. Tether straps
are available as an accessory for many older
safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat
for information about ordering a tether strap,
or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the
appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been installed
using either the safety belt, the lower
anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you
can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view):
25
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat. For outboard
seating positions, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts. For the center
seating position, route the tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, the head restraints can also be
removed.
E193589
2. Locate the correct anchor behind the gap
cover for the selected seating position.
E142539
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If your child restraint system is equipped with
a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, we also
recommend its use.
26
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80
pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100
pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age
eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat back with knees bent
comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
27
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat back
or no head restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child's head (as measured at
the tops of the ears) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a higher seat
back or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
E142596
28
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a rear
seating position. If all children cannot be
seated and restrained properly in a rear
seating position, properly restrain the largest
child in the front seat.
WARNINGS
Always carefully follow the instructions
and warnings provided by the
manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly
installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your
child's height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of
serious injury or death.
29
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
WARNINGS
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result
in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to
boost a child. They can slide around
and increase the likelihood of injury or death
in a crash.
WARNINGS
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury.
WARNINGS
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
30
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined weight of
child and child seat
Restraint Type
Safety belt onlySafety belt and
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
Safety belt and top
tether anchor
LATCH (lower
anchors only)
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against
the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It
may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Seats (page 145).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
31
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the rear
edge of each rear door and must be set
separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise
to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise
to unlock.
32
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure
children sit where they can be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety
belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a
pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt
under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt
around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one
person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years old
and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. Failure
to follow this could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up in
sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum protection in
an accident.
All seating positions in your vehicle have lap
and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of
the vehicle should always properly wear their
safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety belt).
33
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Safety Belts
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front outboard
passenger seating position.
· Safety belt warning light and
chime.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten the
safety belts when activated. In frontal and
near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. The pretensioners may
also activate when a side curtain airbag is
deployed.
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure you
securely fasten the tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the buckle.
Using a Sliding Clip (If Equipped)
E200788
34
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Safety Belts
Slide the clip away from the tongue so there
is no loose webbing when an occupant or
child seat is buckled up. You can also use
the sliding clip to raise the tongue and
prevent it from rattling or to ease access to
the tongue.
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned
low across the hips. The shoulder portion of
the safety belt should be positioned across
the chest. Pregnant women should also
follow this practice. See the following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should be
positioned low across the hips below the
belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow.
The shoulder belt should be positioned to
cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety belt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking
retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all safety
belts should be checked for proper function.
Belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature or any
other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized
dealer. Failure to replace the belt and
retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard passenger
and rear seat safety belts have both the
vehicle sensitive locking mode and the
automatic locking mode.
35
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Safety Belts
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination safety belts will lock to help
reduce forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this
occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull
webbing out again in a slow and controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed in
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See Child Safety (page
16).
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Non-inflatable safety belts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This indicates the safety
belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
Rear outboard inflatable safety belts
(second row only–if equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull
upward until the entire belt is pulled out.
36
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Safety Belts
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in
the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the rear inflatable safety belt.
The rear inflatable safety belts are fitted in
the shoulder portion of the safety belts of
the second-row outboard seating positions.
Note: The rear inflatable safety belts are
compatible with most infant and child safety
car seats and belt positioning booster seats
when properly installed. This is because they
are designed to fill with a cooled gas at a
lower pressure and at a slower rate than
traditional airbags. After inflation, the
shoulder portion of the safety belt remains
cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable safety belt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag located in the shoulder
safety belt webbing.
• Lap safety belt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front safety belts.
• Impact sensors located in various parts
of the vehicle.
How does the rear inflatable safety belt
system work?
The rear inflatable safety belts will function
like standard restraints in everyday usage.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt will inflate from inside the
webbing.
E146365
37
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Safety Belts
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body than
regular safety belts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control head
and neck motion for passengers.
WARNING
If the rear inflatable safety belt has
deployed, it will not function again. The
rear inflatable safety belt system must be
replaced by an authorized dealer.
The rear inflatable safety belts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes
and some side impact crashes. The fact that
the rear inflatable safety belt did not inflate
in a crash does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNINGS
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the torso.
WARNINGS
Do not use extensions with an
inflatable safety belt.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, a safety belt extension assembly
can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is on a label
located either at the end of the webbing or
on the retractor behind the trim. Also, use
the safety belt extension only if the safety
belt is too short for you when fully extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height adjuster
so that the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness
of the safety belt and increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
E200161
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is locked
in place.
38
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Safety Belts
SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning
chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is
turned to the on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated
and the warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.The driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
39
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Safety Belts
SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front
passenger sensing system to determine if a
front seat passenger is present and therefore
potentially in need of a warning. To avoid
the system turning on the Belt-Minder feature
for objects you place on the front passenger
seat, only the front seat passengers receive
warnings as determined by the front
passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings
for about five minutes) for one passenger
(driver or front passenger), the other
passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder
feature to turn on.
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts before you
switch the ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch
the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before
your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about
1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
more than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
40
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Safety Belts
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder
Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to switch
this feature off, the intent of the system
is to remind you to wear your safety belt to
improve your chance to survive an accident.
We recommend you leave the system
switched on for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P) or neutral
(N).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about 1 minute). After Step 2,
wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on,
buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt.
After Step 4, the safety belt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY
BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts
to make sure there are no nicks, tears or
cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety
belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat back (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions for
additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.
41
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Safety Belts
Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However, if
the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a crash should
also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 325).
42
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Safety Belts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and
crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists
of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, safety belt pretensioners, front
safety belt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, front passenger sensing
system and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a crash,
the restraints control module may deploy the
safety belt pretensioners, one or both stages
of the dual-stage airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
43
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently,
and the risk of injury from a deploying
airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Always transport children 12 years old
and under in the back seat and always
properly use appropriate child restraints.
Failure to follow this could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you could
be seriously injured or killed. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components get
hot after inflation. To reduce the risk
of injury, do not touch them after inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.
44
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation
area may cause those objects to be
propelled by the airbag into your face and
torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 52).
45
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Supplementary Restraints System
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends
a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25
centimeters) between an occupant’s chest
and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat back, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under should
be properly restrained in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take off weight from the seat cushion and
affect the decision of the front passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against
your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
46
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger sensing
system which could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are part
of the front passenger seat and safety belt
to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the front
passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
E177067
The front passenger sensing system uses a
passenger airbag status indicator that will
illuminate indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled).
The indicator lamp is located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminate
for a short period of time when the ignition
is first turned on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear
facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even
with this technology, parents are strongly
encouraged to always properly restrain
children in the rear seat. The sensor also
turns off the passenger front airbag and
seat-mounted side airbag when the
passenger seat is empty.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag, the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
ON lamp and remain illuminated.
47
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Supplementary Restraints System
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the full upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised
to ride in the rear seat.
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status indicatorOccupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seatback, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
48
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Supplementary Restraints System
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
If you think that the status of the passenger
airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect, check
for the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat.
• Objects between the seat cushion and
the center console.
• Objects hanging off the seatback.
• Objects stowed in the seatback map
pocket.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on
the seat.
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
or pushing on the seat.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to be
incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger
sensing system. The person in the front
passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter
due to the conditions described in the list
above.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 52).
If the airbag readiness light is lit, do the
following:
The driver and adult passengers should
check for objects lodged underneath the
front passenger seat, or cargo interfering
with the seat.
If there are lodged objects, or cargo is
interfering with the seat, take the following
steps to remove the obstruction:
• Pull the vehicle over.
• Turn the vehicle off.
• Driver and adult passengers should
check for any objects lodged underneath
the front passenger seat or cargo
interfering with the seat.
• Remove the obstruction(s) (if found).
• Restart the vehicle.
• Wait at least two minutes and verify that
the airbag readiness light is no longer
illuminated.
• If the airbag readiness light remains
illuminated, this may or may not be a
problem due to the front passenger
sensing system.
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to an
authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center. See Getting the
Services You Need (page 277).
49
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Supplementary Restraints System
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag cover,
on the side of the seatbacks (of the front
seats), or in front seat areas that may come
into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The
use of accessory seat covers may
prevent the deployment of the side airbags
and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat
cover on a seat containing an airbag as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNINGS
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The side
airbag system (including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard
side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the
side affected by the crash will be inflated.
The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants
in side impact crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted to
your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver and
front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 52).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side
airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat.
50
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Supplementary Restraints System
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER KNEE
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Keep the glove box door closed while
driving for optimal performance of the
passenger knee airbag during a crash.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct
or place objects in the deployment
path of the knee airbag.
A driver knee airbag is located under or
within the instrument panel. A passenger
knee airbag is located within the glove box
door. During a crash, the restraints control
module may activate the driver and
passenger knee airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions. Under
certain crash and occupant conditions, the
driver and passenger knee airbag may
deploy but the driver front airbag may not
activate. As with front and side airbags, it is
important to be properly seated and
restrained to reduce the risk of death or
serious injury.
Make sure the knee airbags are
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 52).
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner at
the siderail that may come into contact with
a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
curtain airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the headliner.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or the headliner
on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as
you could be seriously injured or killed.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
All occupants of your vehicle including
the driver should always wear their
safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and curtain
airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct
or place objects in the deployment
path of the curtain airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including the A,
B, C and D pillar trim and headliner) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
51
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Supplementary Restraints System
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by
the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is
mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The
Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between
the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side
impact crashes and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front and
rear side windows identified by a label
or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 52).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to the
front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body structure and
tow hooks) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
52
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Supplementary Restraints System
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module. The
restraints control module deploys (activates)
the front safety belt pretensioners, driver
airbag, passenger airbag, knee airbag(s), seat
mounted side airbags, the Safety Canopy
and optional rear inflatable safety belts.
Based on the type of crash (frontal impact or
side impact), the restraints control module
will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning
light is not working. Routine maintenance of
the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to deploy
a safety device.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or
front airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the safety belt
pretensioners and optional rear inflatable
safety belts is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers.
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes or
rollover events. The Safety Canopy may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
53
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Supplementary Restraints System
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
54
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a decrease
in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones, battery
chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be able
to use your remote control. You can lock and
unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the
mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this
situation. See Remote Control (page 56).
55
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
E144506
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to unlock the driver door.
E208898
Slide the release on the back of the remote
control and pivot the cover off to access the
key blade.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys came with
a security tag that provides important vehicle
key cut information. Keep the tag in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete
the transmitter programming to your vehicle.
The transmitter should operate normally
after you replace the battery.
A message will appear in the information
display when the remote control battery is
low. See General Information (page 114).
Intelligent Access Transmitter
The remote control uses two coin-type
three-volt lithium batteries CR2025 or
equivalent.
56
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Keys and Remote Controls
E176225
1. Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover off.
E153890
2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to
separate the housing.
E176226
3. Remove the batteries.
4. Install new batteries with the + facing
each other.
Note: Make sure to replace the label
between the two batteries.
5. Reinstall the housing and cover.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds. The horn will sound and
the turn signals will flash. We
recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate
when the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to deactivate.
Remote Start
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle
is low on fuel.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from outside the vehicle. The transmitter has
an extended operating range.
57
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Keys and Remote Controls
Vehicles with automatic climate control can
be configured to operate when the vehicle
is remote started. See Automatic Climate
Control (page 140).
Many states and provinces have restrictions
for the use of remote start. Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start
systems.
The remote start system will not work if:
• The ignition is on.
• The alarm system is triggered.
• You switch off the feature in the
information display. See General
Information (page 114).
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in P.
• The vehicle battery voltage is too low.
• The service engine soon light is on.
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle
will not remote start if you do not follow this
sequence.
E138626
The tag with your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps will flash twice.
The horn will sound if the system fails to start.
See General Information (page 114).
The power windows will not work during the
remote start and the radio will not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and the
vehicle will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting. See General
Information (page 114).
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If
you programmed the duration to last 10
minutes, the second 10 minutes will begin
after what is left of the first activation time.
For example, if your vehicle had been
running from the first remote start for 5
minutes, your vehicle continues to run now
for a total of 20 minutes. You can extend the
remote start up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The parking
lamps will turn off.
58
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Keys and Remote Controls
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
to remotely switch off your vehicle after
remote starting. This is due to the added
noise of your running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display. See
General Information (page 114).
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides status
feedback of remote start or stop commands.
StatusLED
Remote start or
extension successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful; engine
off
Solid red
Remote start or stop
failed
Blinking red
Waiting for status
update from vehicle
Blinking green
Memory Feature
You can program your intelligent access key
to recall memory positions. See Memory
Function (page 151).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 80).
To re-program the passive anti-theft system
see an authorized dealer.
59
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that remain unprogrammed are
referred to as administrator keys or admin
keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have created a MyKey, you can
access the following information by using
the information display to determine:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle traveled
with a MyKey.
Note: Switch the vehicle on to use the
system.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with
push-button start, when both a MyKey and
an admin remote transmitter are present,
the admin remote transmitter will be
recognized by the vehicle while switching
the vehicle on to start the vehicle.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Safety belt reminder. You cannot disable
this feature. The audio system will mute
when the front seat passengers’ safety
belts are not fastened.
• Early low fuel or charge. The low-fuel or
low charge warning activates earlier,
giving the MyKey user more time to refuel
or recharge.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your
vehicle, are forced on: parking aid and
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) with
cross traffic alert.
• Satellite radio adult content restrictions,
if equipped on your vehicle.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure certain
MyKey settings when you first create a
MyKey and before you recycle the key or
restart the vehicle. You can also change the
settings afterward with an admin key.
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit
to a limit that will prevent the driver
from maintaining a safe speed considering
posted speed limits and prevailing road
conditions. The driver is always responsible
to drive in accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could
result in accident or injury.
60
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
• Audio system maximum volume of 45%.
A message will be shown in the display
when you attempt to exceed the limited
volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or
compensated automatic volume control
will be disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is selected,
you will not be able to switch off Advance
Trac or traction control, 911 Assist or
Emergency Assist, or the do not disturb
feature (if your vehicle is equipped with
these features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into the
ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with a
push-button start, place the key fob into the
backup slot. The location of your backup slot
is in another chapter. See Starting and
Stopping the Engine (page 167).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to get
to the following menu selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey
When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings
for the key(s). See Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings.
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or fob.
61
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyKey™
2. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to
get to the following menu selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey settings
using the information display control on the
steering wheel. See Information Displays
(page 114).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key or
fob.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays.Clear MyKey
62
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyKey™
Action and DescriptionMessage
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status.
63
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 114).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance
is by using an admin key to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected,
then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many
MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine
how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has
been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
64
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key (there always has to be at
least one admin key).
• Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless start transmitter is not placed in the backup position.
See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 168).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.
• The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 61).
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
• The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 61).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
65
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 80).I lost a key.
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
• An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 61).
No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.
66
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or
the remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on each door window trim illuminates
when you lock the door. It remains on for
up to 10 minutes after you switch the ignition
off.
Door Lock Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch no longer
operates after 20 seconds. You must unlock
your vehicle with the remote control or
keyless keypad, or switch the ignition on, to
restore function to these switches. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
114).
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock
and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks
the door and the second pull opens the door.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time.
The liftgate release button only operates
when your vehicle's speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. The direction
indicators will flash.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators flash twice to indicate a change
to the unlocking mode. Driver door unlock
mode only unlocks the driver door when you
press the unlock button once. All door unlock
mode unlocks all doors when you press the
67
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
unlock button once. The unlocking mode
applies to the remote control, keyless entry
keypad and intelligent access. You can also
change between the unlocking modes using
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 114).
Reprogramming the Unlocking Function
Note: When you press the unlock button,
either all the doors are unlocked or only the
driver door is unlocked. Pressing the unlock
button again unlocks all the doors.
Press and hold the unlock and lock buttons
on the remote control simultaneously for at
least four seconds with the ignition off. The
direction indicators flash twice to confirm the
change.
To return to the original unlocking function,
repeat the process.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all doors.
The direction indicators will flash.
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
doors will lock again, the horn will sound and
the direction indicators will flash if all the
doors and the liftgate are closed.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Mislock
If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the
hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft
alarm or remote start, the horn sounds twice
and the direction indicators do not flash. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 114).
Opening the Liftgate
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the liftgate.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with
the Key Blade
Locking the Doors
E112203
If the central locking function does not
operate, lock the doors individually using the
key in the position shown.
Left-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock.
68
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
Right-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock.
Unlocking the Doors
If the central locking function does not
operate, unlock the driver door and then
unlock all other doors individually by pulling
the interior door handles.
Note: When the doors have been unlocked
using this method, the doors must be locked
individually until the central locking function
has been repaired.
Activating Intelligent Access
The intelligent access key must be within
3.3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
At a Door
Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and
open the door. Make sure not to touch the
lock sensor area on the front of the handle.
E157085
Touch the top of the door handle to lock your
vehicle. Your vehicle will remain locked for
a few seconds.
Note: Keep the door handle clean to make
sure the system operates correctly.
At the Liftgate
E201200
1
2
1. Press the button to unlatch the liftgate.
2. Pull the liftgate upward.
69
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, transmission in park (P)
and the ignition off, the system searches for
an intelligent access key inside your vehicle
after you close the last door. If the system
finds a key, all of the doors immediately
unlock and the horn sounds twice, indicating
that a key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle. To do this, lock your
vehicle after you have closed all the doors
by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the handle
with another intelligent access key in
your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Auto Relock
If you press the unlock button on the remote
control and do not open a door within 45
seconds, your vehicle locks and the alarm
arms. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See Information
Displays (page 114).
Autolock
Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle's speed is greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle's speed is
less than 9 mph (15 km/h).
• Your vehicle's speed is greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
Enabling or Disabling
To enable or disable the autolock feature,
contact an authorized dealer.
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are closed
and your vehicle's speed is greater than
12 mph (20 km/h).
• You stop your vehicle and switch the
ignition off or to accessory.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
70
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
Enabling or Disabling
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 114).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when you unlock the doors with
the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when all doors are closed and you
switch the ignition off.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You press the push button ignition
switch.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave the ignition switched on, it shuts
off when it detects a certain amount of
battery drain, or after 45 minutes.
MANUAL LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety
belt properly. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you
must drive with the liftgate open, keep the
vents or windows open so outside air comes
into your vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
71
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
Opening the Liftgate
Manually
E201200
1
2
1. Press the button to unlatch the liftgate.
2. Pull the liftgate upward.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within three
seconds, and then pull on the
outside handle.
Closing the Liftgate
E155976
A handle is located inside the liftgate to help
with closing.
72
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Make sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and properly using
a safety belt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you
must drive with the liftgate open, keep the
vents or windows open so outside air comes
into your vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
WARNINGS
Keep keys out of reach of children. Do
not allow children to operate or play
near an open or moving power liftgate. You
should supervise the operation of the power
liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
Three warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. If there is a problem
with the open or close request, one of the
following may occur:
• One chime sounds if the ignition is on
and the transmission is not in park (P).
• Three chimes sound if the battery voltage
is below the minimum operating voltage.
• One chime sounds if the vehicle speed
is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully
opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible
gas strut failure. A repetitive chime sounds
and the liftgate closes under control. Remove
any excessive weight from the liftgate. If the
liftgate continues to close after opening,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
73
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
From the Instrument Panel
E138633
Press the button on the
instrument panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control. If
an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
E201985
2
2. Press the liftgate release button.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction. Manually
interfering with the liftgate motion may also
replicate a gas strut failure.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch.
E138636
Press and release the liftgate control button.
74
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
You can stop the liftgate movement by doing
any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the remote
control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
• Activating the obstacle detection feature.
• Moving your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion.
*
*
This method only works for vehicles with the
hands-free liftgate feature.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when it
reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped moving,
you can also manually move it to the desired
height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control button
on the liftgate until you hear a chime,
indicating programming is complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the power
liftgate, you can manually move it to a
different height.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height, even if you disconnect
the battery.
When operating the power liftgate after you
have programmed a lower height than fully
open, you can fully open the liftgate by
manually pushing it upward to the maximum
open position.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Three chimes sound and the
system reverses to open. Once you remove
the obstacle, you can power close the
liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate
is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce
and activate obstacle detection. To prevent
this, let the power liftgate close completely
before you enter your vehicle. Before driving
off, check the instrument cluster for a liftgate
or door ajar message or warning indicator.
Failure to do this could result in
unintentionally leaving the liftgate open
while driving.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound. Once
you remove the obstacle, you can continue
to operate the liftgate.
75
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped)
Make sure you have an intelligent access
transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.
E201983
2
1
1. Move your foot under and away from the
rear bumper detection area in a
single-kick motion. Do not move your
foot sideways or the sensors may not
detect the motion.
2. The liftgate powers open or close.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction. Manually
interfering with the liftgate motion may also
replicate a gas strut failure.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
intelligent access key away from the rear
bumper detection area when washing your
vehicle.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.
E138637
You can use the keypad to do the following:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Release the liftgate.
• Recall memory seat and mirror positions.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
76
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner’ s wallet card in the glove box
and is available from an authorized dealer.
You can also program up to five of your own
five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing step 2.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat steps 1 through 3, then for step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
For vehicles with MyLincoln Touch, you can
also program the system with a personal
entry code. See Settings (page 403).
Hints:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions (If Equipped)
The programmed entry codes recall driver
memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory
positions.
• Entry code 3 recalls driver 3 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 do not
recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode if
you enter the wrong code seven times. This
mode turns off the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch the ignition on.
• You unlock your vehicle using intelligent
access.
77
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 simultaneously
with the driver door closed. You do not need
to enter the keypad code first.
Unlocking the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code. You must press each number
within five seconds of each other. The
interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you switch on the
all-door unlocking mode. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 67).
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code, then press 3·4 within five
seconds.
To Release the Liftgate
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code, then press 5·6 within five
seconds.
Displaying the Factory-Set Code
Note: You need to have two programmed
intelligent access keys for this procedure.
E203693
1
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
E203694
2
2. With the buttons facing the rear of your
vehicle and the key ring up, place the
first intelligent access key into the
backup slot inside the center console.
3. Press the push button ignition switch
once and wait a few seconds.
4. Press the push button ignition switch
again and remove the key.
5. Insert the second programmed key into
the backup slot, then press the push
button ignition switch.
78
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
The factory-set code appears in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
79
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in engine
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may result in vehicle starting problems,
especially if they are too close to the key
when starting your vehicle. Prevent these
objects from touching the coded key when
starting your vehicle. Switch the ignition off,
move all objects on the key chain away from
the coded key and restart your vehicle if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with a
coded key, it is not operating correctly. A
message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
The system arms when you switch the
ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
The system disarms when you switch the
ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and turns on the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your coded keys are lost or stolen and you
do not have an extra coded key, you need
to erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Store a spare intelligent access key away
from your vehicle in a safe place. You can
purchase replacement keys or remote
controls from an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
intelligent access keys to your vehicle.
You must have two previously programmed
intelligent access keys inside your vehicle
and the new unprogrammed intelligent
access keys readily accessible. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the spare key
programmed if two previously programmed
keys are not available.
80
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Security
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before beginning
and that they remain closed throughout the
procedure. Carry out all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and
wait for at least one minute before starting
again if you carry out any steps out of
sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
E203693
1
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
E203694
2
2. With the buttons facing the rear of your
vehicle and the key ring up, place the
intelligent access key into the backup
slot.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
4. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in the
backup slot and press the push button
ignition switch.
7. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
8. Remove the intelligent access key.
9. Wait five seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access key in
the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If
programming remains unsuccessful, contact
an authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if
any door, the luggage compartment or the
hood is opened without using the key,
remote control or keyless entry keypad.
81
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Security
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your
vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
82
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
- VEHICLES WITH: MANUAL
ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 145).
E191039
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E191047
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
- VEHICLES WITH: POWER
ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 145).
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the
control.
83
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Steering Wheel
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the
motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control again.
The steering column may begin to move
again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for an
additional few seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position is set. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
will stop just short of the end of the column
position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 151).
Note: Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the steering
column will move to allow extra room to exit
your vehicle. The column will return to the
previous setting when you switch the ignition
on. You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 114).
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions with
the control:
E145979
Volume up.A
Volume down.B
Seek up or next.C
Seek down or previous.D
Mute.E
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
84
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Steering Wheel
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
E145980
Voice recognition.A
End call.B
Answer call.C
See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 392).
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E145976
Type 2
E145977
See Cruise Control (page 223).
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
E173617
See Information Displays (page 114).
Cluster Display Control Features
E173616
85
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Steering Wheel
Use this control to access some of the
MyLincoln Touch features in the information
display. Navigate through the screen and
press OK to select. See MyLincoln Touch™
(page 392).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If Equipped)
See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 392).
86
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.
D
C
B
E169313
A
Single wipeA
Intermittent wipeB
Normal wipeC
High speed wipeD
Intermittent Wipe
C
B
A
E169314
Shortest wipe intervalA
Intermittent wipeB
Longest wipe intervalC
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
87
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wipers and Washers
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, your low beam
headlamps will illuminate automatically when
the rain sensor activates the windshield
wipers continuously.
Note: Wet or winter driving conditions with
ice, snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
In these conditions, you can do the following
to help keep your windshield clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch the autowipers off.
A
C
B
E169315
Highest sensitivityA
OnB
Lowest sensitivityC
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor.
You will find it in the area around the interior
mirror. The rain sensor monitors the amount
of moisture on the windshield and
automatically turns on the wipers. It will
adjust the wiper speed by the amount of
moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield.
Note: This autowiper feature is automatically
set to on and remains on until you switch it
off in the information display. You can also
switch the feature back on at any time. See
Autowipers (page 88).
Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor. Set the control to low
sensitivity, and the wipers will turn on when
the rain sensor detects a large amount of
moisture on the windshield. Set the control
to high sensitivity, and the wipers will turn
on when the rain sensor detects a small
amount of moisture on the windshield.
88
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wipers and Washers
Note: When you set the wiper system to
intermittent wipe and the autowiper system
is on, the autowiper sensitivity setting adjusts
the wiper speed according to the moisture
on the windshield only. Use the wiper lever
to wipe the windshield on-demand.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This may cause
the washer pump to overheat.
E169316
To operate the washers and spray the
windshield, pull the lever toward you.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after
washing to clear any remaining washer fluid.
This feature can be switched on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 114).
Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer will also
operate the front camera washer.
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
Note: Make sure you switch the rear window
wiper and ignition off before using an
automatic car wash.
A
B
C
E171615
Intermittent wipe.A
Low speed wipe.B
Off.C
Press the top of the button to switch
intermittent wipe on. Press the top of the
button again to switch low speed wipe on.
Press the bottom of the button to switch the
rear window wiper off.
89
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wipers and Washers
When you switch on the front wipers and
move the gearshift lever to reverse (R), rear
intermittent wipe automatically turns on.
Rear Window Washer
E167407
Push the lever away from you to operate the
rear window washer. When you release the
lever, wiping continues for a short period of
time.
90
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate
normal changes in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can occur when
the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on
the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
OffA
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps
B
HeadlampsC
91
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Lighting
High Beams
E162679
Push the lever forward to switch the high
beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the lever
toward you to switch the high beams off.
Headlamp Flasher
E162680
Pull the lever toward you slightly and release
it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime fog.
Always ensure that your headlamps are
switched to auto or on, as appropriate, during
all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a collision.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps automatically turn
on in low light situations or when the wipers
activate.
If equipped, the following also activate when
the lighting control is in the autolamps
position and you switch them on in the
information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.
92
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Lighting
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use the
information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on. See Information Displays (page 114).
Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps
position, you cannot switch the high beam
headlamps on until the autolamps system
turns the low beam headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after you
switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps will not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect the battery or it
becomes discharged, the illuminated
components will switch to the maximum
setting.
A B
E165366
Press repeatedly or press and hold
to dim.
A
Press repeatedly or press and hold
to brighten.
B
93
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Lighting
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You will
hear a short tone. The headlamps will switch
off automatically after three minutes with any
door open or 30 seconds after the last door
has been closed. You can cancel this feature
by pulling the direction indicator toward you
again or switching the ignition on.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
The daytime running lamps system
does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting during
low visibility driving conditions. Also, the
autolamps switch position may not activate
the headlamps in all low visibility conditions,
such as daytime fog. Make sure the
headlamps are switched to auto or on, as
appropriate, during all low visibility
conditions. Failure to do so may result in a
crash.
Type 1 - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type 2 - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or off
using the information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 114).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. They are switched on in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
114).
2. The ignition is switched to the on
position.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions or
the parking brake is released for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not activate the daytime running lamps,
and you can use them to temporarily override
autolamp control.
94
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Lighting
When switched off in the information display,
the daytime running lamps are off in all
lighting control switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
The system will automatically turn on your
high beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the tail
lamps of the preceding vehicle or street
lighting, the system will turn off the high
beams before they distract other drivers. The
low beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic control of
the high beams is not functioning properly,
check the windshield in front of the camera
for a blockage. A clear view of the road is
required for proper system operation. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera’s field-of-view repaired.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system will go into low beam
mode until you clear the blockage. A
message may also appear in the instrument
cluster display noting the front camera is
blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water spots
will not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam system . However, in
cold or inclement weather conditions, you
will notice a decrease in the availability of
the high beam system, especially at start up.
If you want to change the beam state
independently of the system, you may switch
the high beams on or off using the
multifunction switch. Automatic control will
resume when conditions are correct.
Note: Modification of the vehicle ride height
such as using much larger tires, may
degrade feature performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to decide when to switch
the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
will switch on if:
• the ambient light level is low enough
• there is no traffic in front of the vehicle
• the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (52 km/h)
The high beams will switch off if:
• the system detects the headlamps of an
approaching vehicle or the tail lamps of
a preceding vehicle.
• vehicle speed falls below approximately
27 mph (44 km/h)
• the ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required
• the system detects severe rain, snow or
fog
• the camera is blocked
Activating the System
Switch on the system using the information
display and autolamps. See Information
Displays (page 114). See Autolamps (page
92).
95
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Lighting
E142451
Switch the lighting control to the autolamps
position.
Manually Overriding the System
E169254
When the automatic control has activated
the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk
will provide a temporary override to low
beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or turn
the lighting control switch from autolamps to
headlamps.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS (If Equipped)
The headlamp beams move in the same
direction as the steering wheel. This provides
more visibility when driving around curves.
A. Without adaptive headlamps
B. With adaptive headlamps
E161714
B
A
The system will only work with the lighting
control switch in the autolamp position.
96
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Lighting
E142451
Note: There may be a delay of up to five
seconds before the system will operate when
the vehicle is first driven.
Note: The system is only active at speeds
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
When the vehicle is started, the lamps track
to a predetermined position, then back to
center to alert the driver that the system is
working properly.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E169255
Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
WELCOME LIGHTING
The Lincoln welcome mat projection lights
are on the bottom of the exterior mirror
housings. They will project an image onto
the ground a short distance from your vehicle
when welcome lighting or lighted entry turns
on.
For auto-fold mirrors, the Lincoln welcome
mat will turn on when welcome lighting or
lighted entry turns on and the mirrors have
been automatically folded in upon locking
or using the switch on the door.
Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up or
other types of contamination on the surface
of the light lens can cause non-permanent
distortion or reduced brightness of the
image. Do not use abrasive materials to
clean the lens.
Note: If you enable auto-fold and then you
fold the mirrors in manually to the door
window glass, then the welcome mats will
not turn on.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps will turn on when you have met
one of the following conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the all lamps on button on the
front interior lamp.
97
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Lighting
Front Interior Lamp
Note: The front interior lamp buttons are on
the overhead console. The exact location of
each button on the overhead console
depends upon which roof, moonroof, and
window shade features are equipped on the
vehicle.
Note: Press the button to switch the door
function off when you open any door. The
indicator lamp will light amber when the door
function is off. When the door function is off
and you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps will stay off. Press the button again to
switch the door function back on. The
indicator lamp will light blue when the door
function is on. When the door function is on
and you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps will light.
Type 1
E201074
D D
CA
B
All lamps on buttonA
Door function buttonB
All lamps off buttonC
Individual dome lampsD
Type 2
E205851
C C
A
B
Door function buttonA
All lamps on buttonB
Individual dome lampsC
You can switch individual map lamps on
independently by pressing a map lens.
98
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Lighting
Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped)
Type 1
E169470
Type 2
E199026
Type 3
E199027
You can switch dome lamps on by pressing
the button.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
The ambient lighting system is adjusted with
the touchscreen system. See MyLincoln
Touch™ (page 392). See MyLincoln Touch™
(page 392).
99
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may seriously
injure themselves.
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there is
an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse if
it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury
or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window closes fully.
100
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when you
lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several
minutes after you switch the ignition off or
until you open either front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
authorized dealer. See General Information
(page 114).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your vehicle,
press and hold the remote control unlock
button to open the windows. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the lock
or unlock button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings.
To close the windows, press and hold the
remote control lock button. Release the
button once movement starts. Press the lock
or unlock button to stop movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
101
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Windows and Mirrors
E144073
Left-hand mirror.A
Adjustment control.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
on (with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running) and then:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The
control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust the
position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Auto-Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors fold in toward the glass
automatically when you place the
transmission into park (P), open a front door
and then lock your vehicle by using either
the lock button on the door or with the lock
button on your remote transmitter.
Auto-folding mirrors unfold and return to their
original position automatically after you
unlock your vehicle, and then open and close
the driver's door.
You can switch this feature on and off
through the information display. See General
Information (page 114).
E170431
You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the door lock control located on the
door. The control will light and the mirrors
will fold in toward the glass. Press the control
again to unfold the mirrors. The control light
will turn off.
Note: If you use the control to fold the
mirrors on demand and the auto fold feature
is switched on, you must use the control
again to unfold them.
102
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Windows and Mirrors
Loose Mirror
You can manually fold an auto-folding mirror
by pulling it toward the door window glass.
This may cause the mirror to appear loose
and it will need to be re-synchronized. Press
the control to fold the mirrors in until the
movement stops. You will hear a click that
indicates re-synchronization. If you do not
hear a click, use the control again to fold the
mirrors all the way out, and then in again.
Once you hear the click, the mirrors will
operate normally until you fold them
manually again.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
143).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 151).
Auto-dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver exterior mirror automatically dims
when the interior auto-dimming mirror turns
on.
Signal Indicator Mirrors
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you activate the turn
signal.
Lincoln Welcome Mat
Projection lights, on the bottom of the mirror
housings, project an image onto the ground
a short distance from the vehicle. See
Lighting (page 91).
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex
mirror built into the upper outboard corner
of the exterior mirrors. They can assist you
by increasing visibility along the side of your
vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror. If
no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is
at a safe distance, signal that you are going
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder
to verify traffic is clear, and carefully change
lanes.
103
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Windows and Mirrors
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the main
mirror when it is at a distance. The image
becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image will
transition from the main mirror and begin to
appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle
approaches (B). The vehicle will transition to
your peripheral field of view as it leaves the
blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System (page
237).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger
or raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
104
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended in
the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the roof
opening.
The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop its
movement during one-touch operation, press
the control a second time.
105
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Windows and Mirrors
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E191272
Moonroof open. Press and release
to open the moonroof. The
moonroof stops short of the fully
opened position. Press and release
the control again to open the
moonroof fully.
A
Moonroof vent. Press and release
to vent the moonroof.
B
Sunshade open. Press and release
to open the sunshade. The
sunshade opens automatically with
the moonroof. You can also open
the sunshade with the moonroof
closed. Note: The sunshade stops
short of its fully opened position
for the comfort of rear passengers.
To open the sunshade fully, press
the control again.
C
Sunshade close. Press and release
to close the sunshade. Note: The
sunshade does not fully close
unless the moonroof glass is fully
closed.
D
Moonroof close. Press and release
to close the moonroof from either
the open or vent positions.
E
Bounce-Back
The moonroof automatically reverses some
distance if an obstacle is detected while
closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close control within two seconds
after the roof comes to a stop following a
bounce-back reversal.
106
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
E152749
TachometerA
Information displayB
107
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Instrument Cluster
SpeedometerC
Fuel gaugeD
Engine coolant temperature gaugeE
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated distance
your vehicle has traveled.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 114).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 114).
Fuel Gauge
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when
your vehicle is moving or on a gradient.
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank. The arrow adjacent to the
fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of
your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
The needle should move toward F when you
refuel your vehicle. If the needle points to E
after adding fuel, this indicates your vehicle
needs service soon.
After refueling some variability in needle
position is normal:
• It may take a short time for the needle to
reach full after leaving the gas station.
This is normal and depends upon the
slope of pavement at the gas station.
• The fuel amount dispensed into the tank
is a little less or more than the gauge
indicated. This is normal and depends
upon the slope of pavement at the gas
station.
• If the gas station nozzle shuts off before
the tank is full, try a different gas pump
nozzle.
• There is a small reserve left in the tank
when the fuel gauge reaches empty.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel reminder triggers when the
distance to empty reaches 50 miles (80 km),
25 miles (40 km) and 10 miles (16 km) to
empty.
Variations:
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
108
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure
they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective
system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system indicator
light changes color to indicate
what mode the system is in. See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 224).
On (white light): Illuminates when you switch
on the adaptive cruise control system. Turns
off when you switch off the speed control
system.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when you
engage the adaptive cruise control system.
Turns off when you disengage the speed
control system.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You continue to have
the normal braking system (without ABS)
unless the brake system warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Autohold Active
E197933
It illuminates when the system
holds your vehicle stationary.
Autohold Unavailable
E197934
It illuminates when the system is
on, but unavailable to hold your
vehicle stationary.
Automatic High Beam Control
It will illuminate when this feature
is on. See Automatic High Beam
Control (page 95).
109
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Instrument Cluster
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked by
an authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
It illuminates when you switch this
feature off or in conjunction with a
message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 237). See
Information Messages (page 121).
Brake System
E144522
It illuminates when you engage the
parking brake with the ignition on.
If it illuminates when you are
driving, check that you did not engage the
parking brake. If you did not engage the
parking brake, this indicates a low brake fluid
level or a brake system malfunction. Have
the system checked immediately by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance may occur.
It will take you longer to stop your vehicle.
Have your vehicle checked by your
authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the risk
of personal injury.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
It illuminates when you switch this
feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when you switch on the
left or right direction indicator or
the hazard warning flasher. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a
burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 321).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Electric Park Brake
E146190
It illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake has a
malfunction. See Electric Parking
Brake (page 195).
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible,
switch off the engine and let cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 309).
110
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Instrument Cluster
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the engine
oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 308).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
It illuminates and a chime sounds
to remind you to fasten your safety
belt. See Safety Belt Minder
(page 40).
Front Airbag
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates a
malfunction. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights illuminates on
the windshield in certain instances
when using adaptive cruise control
and/or the collision warning system. It also
illuminates momentarily when you start your
vehicle to make sure the display works.
High Beam
It illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It flashes
when you use the headlamp
flasher.
Hood Ajar
E159324
Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.
Liftgate Ajar
E162453
Illuminates when the liftgate is not
completely closed.
Low Beam Malfunction Warning
E181350
It will illuminate when there is a
malfunction with the low beam
headlamp bulb.
Low Fuel Level
It illuminates when the fuel level is
low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp remains
on with the engine running or
when driving, check your tire pressure as
soon as possible.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
111
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Instrument Cluster
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It illuminates when you switch the
parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when the system
detects a powertrain or an AWD
fault. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon indicator
light stays illuminated after you
start the engine, it indicates that
the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has
detected a malfunction of the vehicle
emissions control system. Refer to On board
diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling
chapter for more information about having
your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control
System (page 179).
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your catalytic
converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and
have your vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other
vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Have your vehicle serviced immediately.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when you first switch the ignition
on before engine start to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light stays
on until you crank the engine, then turns
itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the service
engine soon light blinks eight times, it means
that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
See Emission Control System (page 179).
Stability Control
E138639
It flashes when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated or
does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the system
switches off. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. See
Using Stability Control (page 204).
112
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control Off
It illuminates when you switch the
system off. It goes out when you
switch the system back on or when
you switch the ignition off.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Keyless Warning Alert
The horn will sound twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key and
your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle
is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
113
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display controls
on the steering wheel. Corresponding
information appears in the information
display.
Information Display Controls
E152750
• Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of
the information display, you can choose from
the following categories:
• Trip 1 & 2
• Fuel Economy
• Driver Assist
• Settings
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back to
the main menu.
Trip 1 & 2
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
114
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2
Trip Timer
Trip Odometer
Average Fuel Economy
Digital Speedometer
Press and hold OK to reset the currently displayed trip information.
• Trip Timer— Timer stops when you switch off the vehicle and restarts when you restart the vehicle.
• Trip odometer — Shows the accumulated trip distance.
• Average fuel economy — Shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
• Digital speedometer — Shows the current vehicle speed. Appears in the center of the speedometer gauge.
Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to choose
the desired fuel economy display.
115
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy
Fuel History
Average Speed
• Instant Fuel Economy - Shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy since the function was last reset.
• Fuel History - Shows a bar chart of your fuel history.
• Average Speed - Displays the average speed you have driven.
Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
Driver Assist
Traction Control - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Sport or NormalSteering in "D"Adaptive Steering
Sport or NormalSteering in "S"
Blind Spot - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Cross Traffic Alert - check enabled or uncheck disabled
116
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Driver Alert - Check enabled or uncheck disabledDriver Alert
Driver Alert Display
Intelligent AWD
Alert, Aid or BothModeLane Keeping Sys
High, Normal or LowIntensity
High, Normal or LowAlert SensitivityPre-Collision
Dist. Indication - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Active Braking - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Front Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Rear Park Aid - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Tire PressureTire Monitor
Reset
Trailer Sway - Check enabled uncheck disabled
117
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Tire Pressure
E200335
The low tire pressure warning light will turn
on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’ s recommended tire pressure.
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
Settings
Comfort, Normal or SportHandling in DDrive ControlVehicle
Normal or SportHandling in S
Normal or SportPerformance in S
Easy Entry / Exit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Auto Engine Off - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Right Hand Traffic or Left Hand
Traffic
Traffic SetupAdaptive HeadlampsLighting
On or OffAuto Highbeam
118
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Settings
Select time intervalAutolamp Delay
Daytime Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Welcome Lighting - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autounlock - check enabled or uncheck disabledLocks
Audible - check enabled or uncheck disabledFeedback
Exterior Lights - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Mislock - check enabled or uncheck disabled
All Doors or Driver's DoorRemote Unlock
Switch Inhibit - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Autofold - check enabled or uncheck disabledMirrors
Hold OK to InitializeNeutral Tow
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life Reset
Enable Switch or Disable SwitchPower Liftgate
Auto or Last SettingClimate ControlRemote Start
Auto or OffSeats and Steering Wheel
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
119
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Settings
System - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Seatbelts
Remote Open/Close - check enabled or uncheck disabledWindows
Courtesy Wipe - check enabled or uncheck disabledWipers
Rain Sensing - check enabled or uncheck disabled
MyKey StatusMyKey
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb
Always On or User SelectableTraction Control
Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
Choose desired speed or offSpeed Minder
Volume Limiter - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/LDistanceDisplay
Fahrenheit or CelsiusTemperature
120
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Settings
psi, kPa or BARTire Pressure
Choose your applicable settingLanguage
Speedometer in km/h - check enabled or uncheck disabled
Note: Some MyKey items only appear if a MyKey is set.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages display or are available. Certain
messages may be abbreviated or shortened
depending upon which cluster type you
have.
E145981
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages are removed
automatically after a short time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
Displayed when the system needs service. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Active Park Fault
121
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 224).
Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 224).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available
Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/
mud/water in front of radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 224).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displayed when the automatic braking has been disabled.Normal Cruise Active Automatic Braking
Turned Off
Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging.Front Sensor Not Aligned
Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to
Activate
Displays when the adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap distance and the driver
needs to shift the transmission into a lower gear.
Adaptive Cruise Shift Down
122
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac
Displayed when the traction control has been disabled or enabled by the driver.AdvanceTrac Off On
Airbag
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger Seat
Alarm
ActionMessage
Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm
(page 81).
Vehicle Alarm to Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle
123
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off in XX Seconds
Displays when the engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off for Fuel Economy
Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering
wheel button to override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in XX Seconds Press Ok
to Override
AWD
ActionMessage
Displayed when the AWD system has been temporarily disabled to protect itself from overheating.AWD Temporarily Disabled
Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically disabled to protect itself. This is caused
by operating the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating.
AWD Off
The AWD system resumes normal function and clears this message after driving a short distance
with the road tire re-installed or after the system is allowed to cool.
AWD Restored
Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control/Transmission/AWD light when the AWD system
is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
AWD Malfunction Service Required
124
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
Displayed when the charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
Displayed when the battery management system detects an extended low-voltage condition.
Various vehicle features are disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the
electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the system voltage has
recovered, the disabled features operate again as normal
Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned
Off
Displayed when the battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of
charge. Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message clears once
the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unneces-
sary electrical loads allows faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off to Save Battery
125
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
Displayed when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Blindspot System Fault
Displayed when the system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. See Blind Spot Information System (page 237).
Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Displayed when the system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 237).Cross Traffic Vehicle Coming From X
Displayed when the blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are
blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 237).
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Displays when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Cross Traffic System Fault
126
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system is
disabled. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Malfunction
Displayed when the collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility
due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of the radar. You can typically clean the sensor to
resolve. If the concern persists, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system is
disabled. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not Available
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and the vehicle is moving.X Door Ajar
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed.
Displays when the liftgate is not completely closed.Liftgate Ajar
127
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the hood is not completely closed.Hood Ajar
Displays when the door switches have been disabled.Switches Inhibited Security Mode
Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has been reset. See Keyless Entry (page
76).
Factory Keypad Code XXXXX
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest Now
Take a rest break soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested
Fuel
ActionMessage
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
128
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer.Hill Start Assist Not Available
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.Press Brake to START
Displayed if the key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting (page 167).No Key Detected
Displayed when the start/stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access
key is not detected inside the vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is Needed
Displayed when the vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active
This message is displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent access key is programmed to the
system.
Key Program Successful
Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent access key has failed to be
programmed.
Key Program Failure
129
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum number of keys have been
programmed.
Max Number of Keys Learned
Displayed during spare key programming when not enough keys have been programmed.Not Enough Keys Learned
Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key Battery Low Replace Soon
Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys.Could Not Program Integrated Key
Displays to inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle and the engine is on.Engine On
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires the windshield to be cleaned to operate
properly.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Front Camera Malfunction Service
Required
Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
130
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
LOW Engine Oil Pressure
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 308).Change Engine Oil Soon
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 308).Oil Change Required
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately.
See Brake Fluid Check (page 315).
Brake Fluid Level LOW
Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Overtemperature
Displays when the washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
Displays when the engine has reduced power in order to help reduce high coolant temperatures.Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp
Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may not allow some
features to operate properly. See an authorized dealer.
Transport / Factory Mode
Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
131
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot be programmed.MyKey Not Created
Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive Safely
Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is
approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is reached.Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting
Displays when MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive Safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
Displays when a MyKey is in use and AdvanceTrac is activated.AdvanceTrac On - MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Traction control is activated.Traction Control On - MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activated.MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated
Displayed when the lane keeping aid is on per MyKey settings.Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting
132
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Park Aid
ActionMessage
Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized
dealer. See Front Parking Aid (page 206).
Check Front Park Aid
Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact an authorized
dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 206).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than
3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized
dealer.
Park Brake Engaged
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. See an
authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction Service Now
Displays when the electric parking brake is not set.Park Brake Not Applied
Displays when the electric parking brake is running a diagnostic check.Park Brake Maintenance Mode
133
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has not been released.Park Brake Use Switch to Release
Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has not been released and the vehicle is
moving.
Press Brake To Release Park Brake and
Switch
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized
dealer.
Park Brake Limited Function Service
Required
Displays when the electric parking brake was not released causing it to overheat.Park Brake System Overheated
Displays when the electric parking brake is set and the vehicle is started.Release Park Brake
Displays when the electric parking brake is set.Park Brake Applied
Displays when the electric parking brake is released.Park Brake Released
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized
dealer.
Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Steering Loss Stop Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system that
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
134
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Remote Start
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and push the gear shift button to drive the vehicle
after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake and Gear Shift
Button
Seats
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not Permitted While Driving
Displays to show where your memory setting has been saved.Memory X Saved
Starting System
ActionMessage
Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the brake.Press Brake to Start
Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start the vehicle.Cranking Time Exceeded
Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.Engine Start Pending Please Wait
Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.Pending Start Cancelled
135
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 359).
LOW Tire Pressure
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page
359).
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more
information on how the system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 359). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Traction Control
ActionMessage
Displays when the traction control system has been switched off or on. See Using Traction
Control (page 200).
Traction Control Off / Traction Control On
Displays when a spinout has occurred and your vehicle has activated the hazard warning flashers.Spinout Detected Hazards Activated
136
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Transmission
ActionMessage
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Malfunction Service Now
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’s possible.Transmission Overheating Stop Safely
The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’ s possible.Transmission Overtemperature Stop Safely
See an authorized dealer.Transmission Service Required
Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission Too Hot Press Brake
Displays when the transmission has overheated and has limited functionality. See Automatic
Transmission (page 182).
Transmission Limited Function See Manual
Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive.Transmission Warming Up Please Wait
A reminder to shift into park. In addition, this message is typical after reconnecting or recharging
the battery until you cycle the ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V Battery (page
316).
Transmission Not in Park
Displays when the transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.Transmission Adjusted
Displays when the transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission Adapt Mode
Displays when the transmission shift lever is locked and unable to select gears.Transmission Indicate Mode Lockup On
Displays when the transmission shift lever is unlocked and free to select gears.Transmission Indicate Mode Lockup Off
Displays when an invalid gear has been selected.Invalid Gear Selection
137
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed.Press Brake Pedal
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed to enable the transmission to shift from
park.
Depress Brake to Shift from Park
Displays when the neutral button N needs to be pressed again to enter neutral hold. See Auto-
matic Transmission (page 182).
Press N again to Enter Stay in Neutral
Mode
Displays when neutral hold is active. See Automatic Transmission (page 182).Stay in Neutral Mode Engaged
Displays when neutral hold is active. See General Information (page 114).Stay in Neutral Tow Engaged See Manual
to Disable
Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake needs to be depressed before exiting
the vehicle. See an authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Confirm Park Brake
Apply Before Exiting the Vehicle
Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake needs to be depressed before exiting
the vehicle. See an authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Cannot Shift Trans Use
Park Brake to Secure Vehicle
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Service Required
Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is shifting to park. See an authorized
dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Vehicle is Shifting to
Park
Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is shifting to reverse. See an authorized
dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Reverse Unavailable
Service Required
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Drive Unavailable Select
S for Drive Service Required
138
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
ActionMessage
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Neutral Unavailable
Service Required
See an authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Sport Unavailable
Service Required
Displays when neutral tow is active and the ignition needs to be turned off. See Towing the
Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 267).
Neutral Tow Engaged Turn Ignition Off for
Towing
Displays while attempting to exit neutral tow. The brake pedal needs to be depressed and park
button selected to deactivate. See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 267).
Neutral Tow Engaged Depress Brake and
Select Park to Exit Neutral Tow
Displays when neutral tow is active and the park brake needs to be released. See Towing the
Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 267).
Neutral Tow Remove Park Brake for
Towing
Displays when neutral tow has been deactivated.Neutral Tow Disengaged
139
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Information Displays
Left-hand temperature control: Adjust the temperature setting using the control on the left-hand side. This control also adjusts the
right-hand side temperature when you switch off dual zone mode.
A
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.B
Right-hand temperature control: Adjust the temperature on the right-hand side.C
A/C: Press the button to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the
time to reach a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
D
MAX A/C: Press the button for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning
automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
F
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during
hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.
Heated seats: Press the button to switch the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats (page 154).G
Climate controlled seats: Press the button to switch the climate controlled seats on and off. See Climate Controlled Seats (page
155).
H
DUAL: Press the button to switch separate passenger side temperature control off and on. When dual zone is off, passenger
temperature settings remain the same as the driver settings.
I
Note: Dual zone automatically turns on when you adjust the right-hand settings.
AUTO: Press the button to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired
temperature. You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding the button for more than two seconds.
J
Power: Press the button to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.K
141
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Climate Control
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns
off. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
L
Heated rear window: Press the button to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 143).M
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary. The system automatically adjusts
to heat or cool the cabin to your selected
temperature as quickly as possible. For the
system to function efficiently, the instrument
panel and side air vents should be fully
open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
142
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Climate Control
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1. Select the MAX A/C function.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
1. Press the defrost button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS
(If Equipped)
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice and
fog. The heated rear window will
automatically turn off after a short period of
time. Start the engine before you switch the
heated rear window on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean or remove decals from the
inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind the
glove box.
143
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Climate Control
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 499).
For additional cabin air filter information, or
to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.
REMOTE START
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle. The
climate control system works to achieve
comfort according to your pre-selected
settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation. You cannot switch
on the displays or indicators during remote
start.
Switch the ignition on to return the system
to its pre-selected settings. You can now
make adjustments normally, but you need to
switch certain vehicle-dependent features
back on, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays (page
114).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats
or cools (based on pre-selected settings).
The rear defroster, heated mirrors and
heated seats do not automatically switch on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display). The rear defroster and
heated mirrors automatically switch on.
144
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take weight off the seat cushion and affect
the decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or death
in the event of a crash. Always sit upright
against your seat back, with your feet on the
floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this can
cause the occupant to slide under the
safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during heavy
braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety
belt over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head
restraint when your vehicle is moving.
145
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
WARNINGS
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when the
seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the head
restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front seat manual head restraints (If
Equipped)
E138642
The front head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
146
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
Rear seat outboard head restraints
E162605
The rear outboard head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
C
Fold button.D
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold both C buttons.
2. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Folding the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button D.
2. Pull it back up to reset.
Rear seat center head restraint
E138645
The rear center head restraint consists of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
147
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Power Front Head Restraint (If Equipped)
E196925
Tilting Manual Head Restraints (If
equipped)
The front seat head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving
or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the front seat or seatback
while your vehicle is moving. This may
result in sudden seat movement, causing the
loss of control of your vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
148
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
E200942
149
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
E165608
Adjusting the Length of the Seat Cushion
(If equipped)
E196924
Adjusting the Upper Seatback and Head
Restraint (If equipped)
E200950
Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active
Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The massage system will turn off after
20 minutes.
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seatback and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.
E156301
150
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
Lumbar and bolster modeMassage mode
Upper lumbarBack massage intensity adjustmentA
Lumbar decrease
Massage intensity decrease and off
*
B
Lower lumbar
**
Cushion massage intensity adjustmentC
Lumbar increaseMassage intensity increaseD
-On and offE
*
The massage feature will default to an
alternating massage mode with back
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature will default to the middle
lumbar mode.
**
Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through the
touchscreen.
E142607
Press the Menu Settings icon, then
Vehicle. Choose Multi-Contour
Seats.
When switched on, the system displays
directions for you to adjust the lumbar
settings in your seat or to set the massage
function.
To access and make adjustments to the
lumbar setting:
1. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
2. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.
To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon, then
Vehicle. Choose Multi-Contour Seats.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press OFF, LO or HI.
MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions
and that all occupants are clear of moving
parts.
151
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
WARNINGS
Do not use the memory function when
your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the position
of the following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Power adjustable foot pedals.
• Optional power steering column.
The memory control is located on the driver
door.
E142554
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving position.
The memory features move to the position
stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when the ignition is off, or when the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N) (and
your vehicle is not moving) if the ignition is
on.
You can also recall a preset memory position
by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked to
a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
• Entering a personal entry code on the
Securicode keypad. See Locks (page
67).
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
adjustment control (or any memory button)
during a memory recall cancels the
operation.
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key Fob
You can save preset memory positions for
up to three remote controls or intelligent
access (IA) keys.
152
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button
for about five seconds. A tone will sound
after about two seconds. Continue
holding until a second tone is heard.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same
procedure – except in step 3, press the
unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote control
or intelligent access key is in range, the
memory function moves to the settings of
the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit feature,
it automatically moves the driver seat
position rearward up to two inches (five
centimeters) when you switch the ignition
off.
The driver seat will return to its previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 114).
REAR SEATS
Adjusting the Rear Seats
WARNING
To prevent possible damage to the
seat or safety belts, make sure that the
safety belts are not buckled when folding
the seatback.
E186789
Folding the Seatback
With the seat empty, pull the lever up to fold
the seatback forward.
Unfolding the Seatback
Rotate the seatback upward until the
seatback latches in the upright position. The
seatback will click when it is locked into
position.
Reclining the Seatback
With the seat occupied, pull the lever up to
recline the seatback.
Easy Fold™ Folding Seat
WARNING
Make sure that the seat is unoccupied
when folding it down. Folding the seat
while occupied could result in damage to the
seat or injury.
Note: The power feature is operational when
the vehicle is in park (P) and the liftgate has
been open for less than 10 minutes.
153
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
The controls are located on the left-hand rear
quarter trim panel (accessible from the
liftgate area).
E187106
Folding the Seatback
Press and hold the left control to lower the
left seatback. Press and hold the right control
to lower the right seatback.
Unfolding the Seatback
Rotate the seatback up until the seatback
latches in the upright position. The seatback
will click when it is locked into position.
HEATED SEATS
Front Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain to
their skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the heated seat to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious personal
injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
154
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
Rear Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch to
enable heating mode. When activated, they
will turn off automatically when you turn the
engine off.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (If
Equipped)
Heated Seats
155
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Touch the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats only function when the
engine is running.
E146309
To operate the cooled seats:
Touch the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
cooled seats are on, the feature turns itself
off. You need to reactivate it.
Climate controlled seat air filter
replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
filters that are integrated with the seats.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
156
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
REAR SEAT ARMREST
E201901
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholders.
The cupholders are located inside the rear
seat armrest. To open the cupholders, push
the plastic panel on the front edge of the
armrest. The cupholders will open.
Push the panel again to close the
cupholders.
157
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are programming. Do
not program the system with the vehicle in
the garage.
Do not use the system with any garage
door opener that does not have the
safety stop and reverse feature as required
by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this
includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious injury
or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the current
settings. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
As well as being programmed for garage
doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks and home
or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below assume
you will be programming HomeLink that was
not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
158
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further action
is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.
See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door Opener
Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
E142658
159
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter until
the HomeLink indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapidly blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the transmitter
into programming mode.
160
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from green to
red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the visor
will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for
up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must be
changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from red to red
and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the indicator
light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until both
blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed
in 30 seconds.
161
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator lights
on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to indicate
the device is in train mode when any of the
three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance can void the user’ s authority
to operate the equipment.
162
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNINGS
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Do not use a power point for operating
a cigar lighter. Incorrect use of the
power points can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an accessory
plug into the power point. This will damage
the power point and blow the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the lower instrument panel.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the rear cargo area.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices plugged
in the power point whenever the
device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power
point, since it will defeat the safety protection
design. Doing so may cause the power point
to overload due to powering multiple devices
that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point will turn off when the
ignition is switched off or the battery voltage
drops below 11 volts.
Use the power point for powering electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on
the rear of the center console.
163
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Auxiliary Power Points
E193395
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the power
point cover may open to the right or upward.
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition is
off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and
switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition
back on, but do not plug your device back
in. Let the system cool off and switch the
ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch
the ignition back on and make sure the
indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical equipment
or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
164
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Auxiliary Power Points
GLOVE BOX
E199447
You can open the glove box by pressing the
button located on the instrument panel.
Note: The electronic glove box will not
function if the vehicle battery is dead, or if
you switch the ignition off and lock the
vehicle.
Manual Entry
E206107
1. Open passenger door.
2. Remove end cap of instrument panel.
3. Insert a pen or pencil into the latch
device to release glove box.
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cupholder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E196998
Front storage compartment.A
USB port.B
Center storage compartment.C
165
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Storage Compartments
Rear auxiliary power point cover.D
Auxiliary power point or cigar
lighter (if equipped).
E
Auxiliary power point.F
Rear climate controls (if equipped).G
USB port.H
Cupholders or cupholders with
cover (if equipped).
I
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
166
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine speeds
can produce very high temperatures
in the engine and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8
kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving characteristics
during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
Ignition Modes
E191075
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not
moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational and
the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once.
Start: Starts the engine.
167
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears
in the information display alerting you that
you exceeded the cranking time. You
cannot attempt to start the engine for at
least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are
limited to a 15-second engine cranking time.
You need to wait 60 minutes before you can
crank the engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting the engine check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park (P)
or neutral.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: A valid passive key must be located
inside your vehicle to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Briefly press the push button ignition
switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, do the
following:
168
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Starting and Stopping the Engine
E203693
1
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
E203694
2
2. With the buttons facing the rear of your
vehicle and the key ring up, place the
intelligent access key into the backup
slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then the push button ignition
switch to switch the ignition on and start
your vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
your vehicle within 10 seconds of switching
it off, even if it does not detect a valid
passive key.
Within 10 seconds of switching your vehicle
off, press the brake pedal and press the push
button ignition switch. After 10 seconds, you
can no longer start your vehicle if it does not
detect a valid passive key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close a
door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
169
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Starting and Stopping the Engine
4. Keep the accelerator pedal fully
depressed and press the push button
ignition switch until the engine starts.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
This feature automatically shuts down the
engine if it has been idling for an extended
period. The ignition also turns off to save
battery power. Before your vehicle shuts
down, a message appears in the information
display showing a timer counting down. If
you do not intervene within 30 seconds, your
vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to inform
you that your vehicle has shut down to save
fuel. Start your vehicle as normal.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. When you switch
it off temporarily, it turns on at the next
ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• Reset the timer by pressing the brake or
accelerator pedal.
• Temporarily switch off the shutdown
feature during the current ignition cycle
using the information display. See
General Information (page 114).
• Press OK or RESET to temporarily switch
the feature off during the current ignition
cycle.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will
be required. When the ignition is switched
off, some electrical circuits, including air
bags, warning lamps and indicators may also
be off. If the ignition was turned off
accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and
re-start the engine.
1. Put the transmission into neutral (N) and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a
safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch until the engine stops, or press it
three times within two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
170
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its
dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
WARNINGS
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below -0.4°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’ s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
171
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
The engine block heater plug is located in a
housing in the right-hand side of the lower
grill. Open the hinged, circular door and
make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4—1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
172
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel capless
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound
stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which
could cause serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle
can produce static electricity. This can
cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded
fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing
agent.
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the filler neck. Never smoke or
use a cell phone while refueling. Fuel vapor
is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is
highly toxic and if swallowed can cause
death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may
not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to
eye and respiratory tract irritation. In
severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with water
for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
173
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuel and Refueling
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and wash
skin thoroughly with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact with
fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
gasoline vapors, or skin contact could
cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or
sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly
with soap and water. Consult a physician
immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a
minmum pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87, particularly in high altitude
areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87 are
not recommended.
Premium fuel provides improved
performance and is recommended for severe
duty usage such as trailer tow.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which
is a manganese-based fuel additive, will
impair engine performance and affect the
emission control system.
174
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuel and Refueling
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily under most driving conditions
while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to
restart the engine. If your vehicle is out
of fuel and on a steep slope, more fuel
may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel into
the fuel system filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the household
refuse or the public sewage system.
Use an authorized waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the plastic funnel included
with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel
Location (page 175).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
will not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
175
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuel and Refueling
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages and remove the fuel tank filler
cap.
Note: Capless fuel systems do not have a
fuel tank filler cap.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
5. Replace the fuel tank filler cap and close
the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it back
in your vehicle or properly dispose of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island.
Switch off your engine when you are
refueling.
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
WARNINGS
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Do not use personal electronic devices
while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
your vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that would hold the
fuel pump handle in the fill position.
176
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuel and Refueling
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.
E166527
2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuel
filler door and release to open.
E156032
Note: Hold the handle of the fuel filler nozzle
higher while you insert the nozzle for easier
access.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into
the fuel system to open both doors.
Leave the nozzle fully inserted until you
have stopped pumping fuel.
E154765
Note: Allow about five to ten seconds after
pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler
nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain
back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the
vehicle.
4. After you have stopped pumping fuel,
slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur if
overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill the
tank to the point that the fuel is able to
bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The overfilled
fuel may run down the drain located below
and in front of the fuel filler door.
177
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuel and Refueling
5. To close the fuel filler door, press the
center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release. The fuel door will latch
closed.
If the fuel fill inlet did not close properly, a
Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear
on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any
visible debris from the fuel fill opening.
4. Insert the fuel fill nozzle, or the fuel fill
funnel provided with the vehicle, several
times to allow the inlet to close properly.
This will dislodge any debris preventing
the inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately. It may
take several driving cycles for the message
to turn off. A driving cycle consists of an
engine start-up (after four or more hours with
the engine off) followed by city or highway
driving. Continuing to drive with the message
on may cause the service engine soon lamp
to turn on as well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable fuel
in the empty reserve varies and should not
be relied upon to increase driving range.
• The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that can be added into
the tank after the gauge indicates empty
• The advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the empty
reserve.
• Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank even
when the fuel gauge reads empty.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high)
each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
178
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuel and Refueling
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of driving
(this is your engine’ s break-in period); a more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2000 miles - 3000 miles (3200 kilometers -
4800 kilometers). Also, fuel expense,
frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings
are not accurate ways to measure fuel
economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least 3 to 5 tank fill ups, fill the
fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing miles
traveled by gallons used (For Metric:
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide
by kilometers traveled).
Keep a record for at least 1 month and record
the type of driving (city or highway). This
provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’ s fuel economy under current driving
conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how
temperature impacts fuel economy. In
general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel
economy.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce
fuel economy (approximately 1 mpg [0.4
km/L] is lost for every 400 pounds [180
kilograms] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks) may reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 8–10 miles
(12–16 kilometers) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel
economy as compared to driving on hilly
terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top cruise
gear and with steady pressure on the gas
pedal.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can
start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If you smell
exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your
dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
179
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuel and Refueling
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a catalytic
converter that will enable your vehicle to
comply with applicable exhaust emission
standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control
components continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of components
affecting emission control, such non-Ford
parts should be the equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance
and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are
not permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the environment
by making sure that your vehicle continues
to meet government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists a service
technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
• the vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
• poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
• the fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 176).
• driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
180
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuel and Refueling
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city/highway driving. No
additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not
have symptoms that are apparent, continued
driving with the service engine soon indicator
on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more
costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) Testing
Some state/provincial and local governments
may have Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from
getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
you may need to have the vehicle
serviced. See On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II).
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, your
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle
is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the
ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds
without cranking the engine. If the service
engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it
means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator
stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is
ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you may
need to perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours
without starting the engine. Then, start the
engine and complete the above driving
cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal
operating temperature. Once started, do not
turn off the engine until the above driving
cycle is complete. If the vehicle is still not
ready for I/M testing, you will have to repeat
the above driving cycle.
181
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure your vehicle is in park (P).
Turn the ignition off and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously for
more than three seconds will limit engine
rpm, which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
Push Button Shift Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
transmission. The shift buttons are located
on the instrument panel next to the
MyLincoln Touch™ system. The gears are
selected by pressing and releasing the
PRNDS buttons.
E146223
Every time a gear is selected, the selected
button will light up. You will also see the gear
selected appear in the instrument cluster.
E155989
Understanding the Positions of your
Electronic Transmission
Note: Always come to a complete stop
before putting your vehicle into and out of
park (P).
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Press and release the button on the
instrument panel of the gear you want to
select.
3. The gearshift button you select will
illuminate and the selected gear will
appear in the instrument cluster.
4. Release the brake pedal and your
transmission will remain in the selected
gear.
Note: If you attempt to leave your vehicle
while it is in gear, your vehicle will
automatically shift into park (P). Safety belt
and door monitors determine your intent and
make the shift for you. During this time, a
message will appear in the information
display screen prompting you to make the
shift to park (P).
182
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Transmission
Note: To put your vehicle in gear with the
door open, perform steps 1-4. See the
Automatic Return to Park section in this
chapter for more information on this feature.
Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your vehicle
locks the transmission and prevents the
wheels from turning. Always come to a
complete stop before putting your vehicle
into and out of park (P). An audible chime
sounds once you select park (P).
When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle
will automatically shift into park (P). If the
ignition is turned off while the vehicle is
moving, it will first shift into neutral (N) until
a slow enough speed is reached. The vehicle
will then shift into park (P) automatically.
Automatic Return to Park
Note: This feature will not operate when your
vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or neutral
tow.
Your vehicle has a safety feature that will
automatically shift your vehicle into park (P)
when any of the following conditions occur:
• You turn the ignition off
• You open the driver's door with your
safety belt unlatched
• Your safety belt is unlatched while the
driver's door is open
If you turn the ignition off while your vehicle
is moving, your vehicle will first shift into
neutral (N) until it slows down enough to shift
into park (P) automatically.
Note: If you have waited an extended period
of time (2-15 minutes) before starting your
vehicle, unlatching your safety belt will cause
this feature to activate, even with the driver's
door closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly if
the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If your
door ajar indicator does not illuminate when
you open the driver’s door or the indicator
illuminates with the driver’ s door closed, see
your authorized dealer.
Reverse (R)
With the transmission in reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the transmission in neutral (N), you can
start your vehicle and it is free to roll. Hold
the brake pedal down while in this position.
Stay in Neutral mode
Stay in Neutral mode allows your vehicle to
stay in neutral (N) when you exit the vehicle.
Your vehicle must be stationary to enter this
mode.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
1. Press the neutral (N) button on your
shifter assembly.
2. A message will appear in your
information display screen prompting you
to press the neutral (N) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.
3. Press the neutral (N) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.
183
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Transmission
A message will appear in your information
display screen when your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.
Note: During this mode the N button will
flash continuously and your instrument
cluster will display N as the selected gear.
Exiting Stay in Neutral mode
To disable Stay in Neutral mode select
another gear. See the Putting the Vehicle
in Gear for instructions on how to do this.
Entering a Carwash
Note: Always put your vehicle in Stay in
Neutral mode when entering an automatic
car wash. Failure to do this could result in
vehicle damage not covered by warranty.
Drive (D)
The normal driving position for the best fuel
economy.
Sport (S)
Putting the vehicle in sport (S):
• Provides additional engine braking and
extends lower gear operation to enhance
performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain
or mountainous areas. This will increase
engine RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear operation
through the automatic transmission shift
strategy.
• Provides gear selection more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission
Your SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears
manually.
Paddle Shifters
With your vehicle in drive (D), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.
You can achieve extensive manual control
by pressing the sport (S) button.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
184
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Transmission
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
mph (km/h)Gear Upshift
ToFrom
15 mph (24 km/h)21
25 mph (40 km/h)32
40 mph (64 km/h)43
45 mph (72 km/h)54
50 mph (80 km/h)65
The instrument cluster will display your
currently selected gear.
E155990
The transmission will automatically upshift if
your engine speed is too high or downshift
if your engine speed is too low.
Note: The system will stay in manual control
until you make another shift button selection.
For example, drive (D).
Brake-Shift Interlock Override
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are working.
185
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Transmission
WARNINGS
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking the vehicle out of park which
means the vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, always fully
set the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
Note: For some markets this feature is
disabled.
Note: This feature will only function if your
12-volt battery has power.
Use the brake-shift interlock override to
move your transmission from the park
position in the event of an electrical
malfunction or if your vehicle has a dead
battery.
1. Apply the parking brake and turn your
ignition off before performing this
procedure.
E152215
2. Locate your brake-shift interlock access
slot. The slot is located below the media
hub, in your center console storage bin.
The access slot does not have a label.
Note: Make sure that you correctly identify
the access hole as not to damage the media
hub.
3. Using a tool, press and hold the brake
shift interlock switch. The shift buttons
on the instrument panel will flash when
your vehicle is in override mode.
4. With the override switch still held, press
the neutral (N) button to shift from park.
5. Release the override button.
6. Your vehicle will remain in Stay in Neutral
mode for wrecker towing purposes or
can be shifted to the desired gear and
driven (if possible).
7. Release the parking brake.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature increases durability and provides
consistent shift feel over the life of your
vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm or soft shifts. This operation will
not affect function or durability of your
transmission and is normal. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation. Additionally, the
strategy must be relearned whenever the
battery is disconnected or a new battery is
installed.
186
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Transmission
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if your engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to your transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to your transmission
and tires may occur, or your engine may
overheat.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control, it
may be beneficial to disengage the
AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control
system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you can help rock your vehicle out by shifting
between forward and reverse gears,
stopping between shifts in a steady pattern.
Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
187
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to power
the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road conditions
that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot. The AWD system is active all the time
and requires no input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in
which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions. Operating
your vehicle under other than those
conditions could subject the vehicle to
excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display when an AWD
system fault is present See Information
Messages (page 121). An AWD system fault
will cause the AWD system to default to
front-wheel drive only mode. When this
warning message is displayed, have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer
Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display if the AWD system
has overheated See Information Messages
(page 121). This condition may occur if the
vehicle was operated in extreme conditions
with excessive wheel slip, such as deep
sand. To resume normal AWD function as
soon as possible, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and stop the engine for at least 10
minutes. After the engine has been restarted
and the AWD system has adequately cooled,
the warning message will turn off and normal
AWD function will return.
Do not use a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided. If the mini-spare
tire is installed, the AWD system may disable
automatically and enter front-wheel drive
only mode to protect driveline components.
This condition will be indicated by a warning
in the information display See Information
Messages (page 121). If there is a warning
message in the information display from
using the spare tire, this indicator should turn
off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced
normal road tire and cycling the ignition off
and on. It is recommended to reinstall the
repaired or replaced road tire as soon as
possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between
the front and rear axles could cause the AWD
system to stop functioning and default to
front-wheel drive or damage the AWD
system.
Driving In Special Conditions With All-
Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on
and off the highway.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
188
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle back
onto the pavement only after reducing
your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the
road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors, with
minor damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the pavement
which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover.
Remember, your safety and the safety of
others should be your primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the transmission is in P
(Park). Turn the ignition to the lock position
or turn the vehicle off using the start/stop
button and remove the key whenever you
leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph
(56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure
a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™, it
may be beneficial to disengage the
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid "over-driving"
your vehicle (i.e., turn the steering wheel
only as rapidly and as far as required to
avoid the emergency). Excessive steering
will result in less vehicle control, not
more. Additionally, smooth variations of
the accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if changes in
vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt
189
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
steering, acceleration or braking which
could result in an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or
personal injury. Use all available road
surface to return the vehicle to a safe
direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e., from concrete to
gravel) there will be a change in the way
the vehicle responds to a maneuver
(steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your AWD vehicle in deep sand.
This will cause the AWD system to overheat.
After the system has cooled down, normal
AWD function will return.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and cause
the vehicle to become stuck to the point that
assistance may be required from another
vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with
caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may be
limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of
the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and proceed
slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
E142667
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of the vehicle.
190
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess
mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts
causes an imbalance that could damage
drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water,
the axle lubricant and AWD PTU (Power
Transfer Unit) lubricant should be checked
and changed if necessary.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities in
our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will use.
Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side.
Do not drive in reverse over a hill without
the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should always try to
drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in
a lower gear rather than downshifting to a
lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating. Do
not descend in neutral; instead, disengage
overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden
hard braking as you could lose control. The
front wheels have to be turning in order to
steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the
brakes.
191
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery conditions
that require tire chains or cables, then
it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep
speeds down, allow for longer stopping
distances and avoid aggressive steering to
reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle
control which can lead to serious injury or
death. If the rear end of the vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and ice.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it
won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for stopping.
Drive slower than usual and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake steadily.
Since your vehicle is equipped with a four
wheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. See
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
(page 194). for more information on the
operation of the anti-lock brake system
(ABS).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and tested
to provide predictable performance whether
loaded or empty and durable load carrying
capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do
not make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (such as lowering kits or
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts
not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the
center of gravity can make it more likely the
vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of
control. Ford Motor Company recommends
that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such
as ladder or luggage racks).
192
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities and adversely affect driver and
passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended
if the vehicle is subjected to off-highway
usage.
193
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels
(page 331).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 109).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly
by measuring the rate at which you press the
brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal,
and can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates
when you turn the ignition on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the system
may be disabled. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
194
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Brakes
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
The electric parking brake replaces the
conventional handbrake. The operating
switch is located in the instrument panel.
WARNING
Always set the parking brake and leave
your vehicle with the transmission in
park (P). Failure to set the parking brake and
placing the transmission in park (P) could
result in vehicle roll-away, property damage
or bodily injury.
Note: When you apply the electric parking
brake in certain conditions, for example, on
a steep hill, the electric parking brake may
reapply the brakes within three to ten
minutes.
Note: You may notice various noises when
you apply and release the electric parking
brake. This is normal and no cause for
concern.
Note: After a determined period of time, the
parking brake will automatically re-calibrate.
This process is short and only performed
when the vehicle is turned off.
Applying the Electric Parking brake
WARNING
The brake system warning lamp will
flash during an electric parking brake
apply. If the brake system warning lamp
continues to flash there could be a problem
with your electric parking brake.
Note: The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate for ten seconds, if the ignition is
turned off after the electric parking brake
has been applied, or the electric parking
brake has been applied after the ignition
has been turned off.
Note: The electric parking brake will not
automatically apply when you park the
vehicle. You must apply the electric parking
brake using the electric parking brake
switch.
E169085
Pull the switch up to apply the electric
parking brake.
195
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Brakes
The brake system warning lamp flashes for
approximately 2 seconds then stays
illuminated to confirm that the electric
parking brake has been applied. See
Information Displays (page 114).
Apply the electric parking brake when the
vehicle is moving
WARNINGS
Applying the electric parking brake
while moving will result in the
engagement of the anti-lock braking system.
Do not use the electric parking brake system
when the vehicle is moving unless the normal
brake system is unable to stop the vehicle.
With the exception of emergency
conditions (for example, the brake
pedal is broken or is blocked), do not apply
the electric parking brake while the vehicle
is moving. On bends, or poor road surfaces
or weather conditions, emergency braking
can cause the vehicle to skid out of control
or off the road.
If you apply the electric parking brake when
your vehicle is moving, the brake system
warning lamp will illuminate and a warning
chime will sound. See Information Displays
(page 114).
If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph
(6 km/h), the braking force is applied as long
as the switch is pulled. Releasing or pressing
the switch or pressing the accelerator pedal
will stop the braking force.
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake
E169086
You can release the electric parking brake
either manually by pressing the switch or
automatically.
Manual release
WARNING
If the brake system warning light
remains illuminated or flashes for more
than 4 seconds after you have released the
parking brake, there could be a problem with
you braking system. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
You can manually release the electric parking
brake by:
1. Turning the ignition on.
2. Pressing the brake pedal.
3. Pressing the electric parking brake
switch.
When the electric parking brake is released,
the brake system warning lamp will turn off.
196
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Brakes
Automatic release - drive away release
Your vehicle will automatically release the
parking brake if all of the following conditions
exist:
• The driver door is closed.
• The accelerator pedal is pressed.
• There are no faults detected in the
parking brake system.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking
brake will not automatically release. You
must release the electric parking brake using
the electric parking brake switch while your
foot is on the brake and the ignition is on.
The brake system warning lamp will go off
to confirm that the electric parking brake has
been released.
Note: The electric parking brake drive away
release makes starting on a hill easier. This
feature will release the parking brake
automatically when the vehicle has sufficient
torque force to move up the hill. To assure
drive away release when starting uphill,
press the accelerator pedal quickly.
Driving with a Trailer
Depending on the slope and the weight of
the trailer, your vehicle and trailer may roll
backwards slightly when you start on a slope.
To prevent this from happening, do the
following:
1. Pull the switch up and hold it in this
position.
2. Accelerate your vehicle, then release the
switch when you notice that the engine
has developed sufficient driving force.
Battery With No Charge
WARNING
You will not be able to apply or release
the electric parking brake if the battery
is low or has no charge.
If the battery is low or has no charge, use
jumper cables and a booster battery.
AUTO HOLD
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking brake.
Failure to leave your vehicle securely parked
may lead to a crash or injury. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 195).
You must remain in your vehicle when
the system turns on. You are
responsible at all times for controlling your
vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
The system will turn off if a malfunction
is apparent. Failure to take care may
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
197
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Brakes
Auto Hold is a feature that uses your
vehicle's brake to hold your vehicle at a stop
once your vehicle has reached a standstill
condition. For example, Auto Hold can assist
you while stopping at traffic lights or while
in traffic jams by holding the brake pressure
for you once you bring your vehicle to a stop.
Switch Auto Hold off during vehicle or trailer
towing.
Note: In case of a malfunction in the system
while Auto Hold actively holds the vehicle
(for example, low power supply), a message
appears in the information display. If you see
this message, press the brake pedal
immediately.
Note: Auto Hold only activates if the system
recognizes it is applying enough brake
pressure. On a steep hill or incline, you may
need to press the brake pedal to activate
the Auto Hold system.
Note: When the parking brake automatically
applies, the red brake lamp appears. This is
normal. When you press the accelerator
pedal, the drive away release feature
automatically releases the parking brake.
Note: Auto Hold works on any and every
road gradient.
E198921
Press the Auto Hold button to switch the
system on and off. The Auto Hold indicator
light illuminates in the Auto Hold button
when the system is on.
Note: You can only switch Auto Hold on if
you close the door and fasten your safety
belt.
Note: Auto Hold turns off every time you
power down your vehicle.
When Auto Hold is off, your vehicle behaves
the same as a vehicle without Auto Hold.
There is an Auto Hold indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster that has two modes, active
and unavailable:
E197933
The Auto Hold (ACTIVE) indicator
light illuminates in the information
display when the system holds
your vehicle stationary. When in active mode,
press the brake pedal and the Auto Hold
button to switch Auto Hold off.
E197934
The Auto Hold (UNAVAILABLE)
indicator light illuminates in the
information display when the
system is on but unavailable to hold your
vehicle (for example, during Active Park
Assist, Car Wash Mode, or when you do not
fasten your safety belt).
Using Auto Hold
1. Bring your vehicle to a stop by pressing
the brake pedal. After coming to a stop,
the green Auto Hold (ACTIVE) indicator
lamp illuminates in the information
display.
198
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Brakes
2. Release the brake pedal. The Auto Hold
(ACTIVE) indicator light remains
illuminated in the information display and
Auto Hold will hold your vehicle at a stop.
3. When you press the accelerator pedal,
Auto Hold will release the brakes and
you will be able to drive off. Once you
drive off, the green Auto Hold (ACTIVE)
indicator no longer illuminates in the
information display.
Note: The Stop/Start system (if equipped)
may stop the engine when you press the
brake pedal. If this occurs, it will restart once
you press the accelerator pedal. Auto Hold
still holds your vehicle at a standstill with the
engine off.
199
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily if a failure is
detected in the system. Verify that the
traction control system was not manually
disabled using the information display
controls or the switch. If the stability control
and traction control light is still illuminating
steadily, have the system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Operating
your vehicle with the traction control disabled
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information display
showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either using
the information display controls or the switch.
Using the Information Display Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General Information
(page 114).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
The switch for the stability control system
and traction control system is located on the
instrument panel.
Use the switch to turn the system off or on.
System Indicator Lights and Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes when
a driving condition activates either of the
systems.
200
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Traction Control
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on:
• When you turn the traction control system
off.
• If a problem occurs in either of the
systems.
201
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving braking
system, aftermarket roof racks,
suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability control
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front
center console, the tunnel, and the front
seats in order to minimize the risk of
interfering with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the
electronic stability control system could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNINGS
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose control
of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose control
of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal
injury or property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
could reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your electronic stability
control system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control system
you may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and your
foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal
may move as the systems applies higher
brake forces.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying
brakes to one or more of the wheels
individually and, if necessary, reducing
engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it
changes by applying the brakes to one or
more wheels individually.
202
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Stability Control
Curve Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to follow the road when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. Curve
Control operates by reducing engine power
and, if necessary, applying brakes to one or
more of the wheels individually.
203
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 200).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability controlB
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™ (RSC®)
The system automatically activates when you
start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac with RSC
system cannot be completely turned off, but
the electronic stability control and roll
stability control portions of the system are
disabled when the transmission is in reverse
(R). You can also turn off the traction control
portion of the system independently. See
Using Traction Control (page 200).
204
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations of
the system as contained in this section.
Sensing is only an aid for some (generally
large and fixed) objects when moving on a
flat surface at parking speeds. Certain
objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves, surrounding vehicle's parking aid
systems, traffic control systems, fluorescent
lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, and
external motors and fans may also affect the
function of the sensing system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
WARNINGS
This system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
The system is designed to provide a warning
to assist the driver in detecting large
stationary objects to avoid damaging your
vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the
ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create
false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 60).
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear
sensing system may detect that add-on
device and therefore provide warnings. It is
suggested that you disable the rear sensing
system when you attach an add-on device
to your vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 114).
Note: On vehicles with front parking aid you
can use the parking aid switch to switch the
system off.
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 121).
205
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object
farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of
the bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the
rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or
less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from
the bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks illuminate
and move towards the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are greyed out.
FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P).
206
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
E187330
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. The coverage area
decreases at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object, a
warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning tone
repeat rate increases. The warning tone
sounds continuously when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks illuminate
and move towards the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are greyed out.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front
sensing system provides audio warnings
when your vehicle is moving and the
detected obstacle is moving towards your
vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary, the
audio warning will be stopped after 2
seconds.
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any other
forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S)
or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio and visual warnings when
your vehicle is moving below a speed of
7 mph (12 km/h) and an obstacle is located
inside the detection area. Once the vehicle
is stationary, the audio warning will be
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the
obstacles detected are within 12 in (30 cm),
the visual indication remains on.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the
system provides visual indication only when
your vehicle is moving at 7 mph (12 km/h) or
below and an obstacle is located inside the
detection area. Once your vehicle is
stationary, the visual indication will stop after
4 seconds.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (If Equipped)
The side sensing system uses the front and
rear side sensors to detect and map
obstacles that are near to the sides of your
vehicle. The side sensors are active when
the transmission is in any position other than
park (P).
Note: Obstacles that enter the side detection
area without being detected and mapped
by the front or rear side sensors will not be
detected.
207
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
E187810
Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from
the sides of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object close to
the side of your vehicle, an audible warning
sounds. As the object comes closer to the
side of your vehicle, the rate of the audible
warning increases. The rate of the audible
warning varies depending on whether the
obstacle is inside or outside of the driving
path of your vehicle.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E190459
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
As the distance to the obstacle decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon. If there is no
obstacle detected, the distance indicator
blocks show greyed out.
When you shift to reverse (R), the side
sensing system provides audible and visual
distance indication when your vehicle is
moving and obstacles are detected within
12 in (30 cm), or when obstacles are detected
within 12–24 in (30–60 cm) and are inside
the driving path of your vehicle. When you
stop your vehicle the audible warning stops
after two seconds.
Note: Visual distance indication remains on
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
When you shift to drive (D) or any other
forward gear, for example, low (L), sport (S)
or any forward gear in manual transmission,
the side sensing system provides audible
and visual distance indication when your
vehicle is moving at 7 mph (12 km/h) or below
and obstacles are detected within 12 in
(30 cm), or when obstacles are detected
within 12–24 in (30–60 cm) and are inside
the driving path of your vehicle. When you
stop your vehicle the audible warning stops
after 2 seconds and the visual distance
indication stops after 4 seconds.
208
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
Note: If the obstacle remains within 12 in
(30 cm) visual distance indication remains
on.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side
sensing system only provides visual distance
indication when your vehicle is moving at
7 mph (12 km/h) or below, for example when
moving on a slope, and obstacles are
detected within 12 in (30 cm). When you stop
your vehicle the visual distance indication
stops after 4 seconds.
If the side sensing system is not available,
the side distance indicator blocks will not be
present.
The side sensing system is not available
under the following condition:
• If you switch the traction control system
off.
The side sensing system may not be
available until you have driven approximately
the length of your vehicle in order for the
system to reinitialize if:
• You switch the ignition on, off and back
on.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system is activated.
• The traction control system is activated.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular
Parking, Park Out Assist
WARNINGS
You must remain in your vehicle when
the system turns on. You are
responsible at all times for controlling your
vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNINGS
The sensors may not detect objects in
heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required by
grabbing the steering wheel or pushing the
active park assist button.
The system detects an available parallel or
perpendicular parking space and
automatically steers your vehicle into the
space (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system
visually and audibly guides you to park your
vehicle.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose to
override the system.
Park Out Assist automatically steers your
vehicle out of a parallel parking space
(hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system
visually and audibly guides you to enter
traffic.
209
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not detect traffic alongside or behind
your vehicle during a park assist maneuver.
The system may not correctly operate in any
of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire significantly
worn more than the other tires.
• You use a unauthorized tire size.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (a
pedestrian or cyclist).
• The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground (for
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck).
• The weather conditions are poor (heavy
rain, snow, fog, etc).
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors
can affect the system's accuracy. Do not
clean the sensors with sharp objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves
or cause ultrasonic interference (motorcycle
exhaust, truck air brakes or horns).
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a foreign object (bike
rack or trailer) to the front or rear of your
vehicle or close to the sensors.
• You have attached an overhanging
object (surfboard) to the roof.
• A foreign object damages or obstructs
the front or rear bumper or side sensors.
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).
Using Active Park Assist - Parallel Parking
E146186
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever or the right side of the center
stack once.
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h) the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. The system displays a
message and a corresponding graphic to
indicate it is searching for a parking space.
Use the direction indicator to select
searching either to the left-hand side or
right-hand side of your vehicle.
210
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
A
E130107
Note: If the direction indicators are not used,
the system defaults to the passenger side
of your vehicle.
Note: The system passively searches for
parking spaces prior to pressing the button,
so activating the system is still possible while
passing a parking space.
When the system finds a suitable space, it
displays a message and a tone sounds. Stop
your vehicle and follow the instructions on
the screen. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may need to pull forward a short
distance before the system is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
Note: Active park assist may not detect
street furniture and other items. You must
make sure the selected space is suitable for
parking.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel as possible to the
other vehicles while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into reverse
( R), with your hands off the wheel (and
nothing obstructing its movement), your
vehicle steers itself into the space. The
system displays instructions to move your
vehicle back and forth in the space.
211
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
E130108
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle to
a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park assist
process is finished. You are responsible for
checking the parking job and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist - Perpendicular
Parking
E146186
Press the button located on the
center console near the gearshift
lever or the right side of the center
stack twice.
The system displays a message and a
corresponding graphic to indicate it is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator to select searching either
to the left-hand side or right-hand side of
your vehicle.
Note: If you do not make a selection the
system will default to the passenger's side.
212
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
E186193
When the system finds a suitable space, it
displays a message and a tone sounds. Stop
your vehicle and follow the instructions on
the screen. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may need to pull forward a short
distance before the system is ready to park.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times during the maneuver.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
4.9 ft (1.5 m) and as perpendicular as
possible to the other vehicles while passing
a parking space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system shows a message to
alert you to reduce your vehicle speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
E186191
When you shift the transmission into reverse
( R), with your hands off the wheel (and
nothing obstructing its movement), your
vehicle steers itself into the space. The
system displays instructions to move your
vehicle back and forth in the space.
213
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
When you think your vehicle is properly
parked, or you hear a solid tone from the
parking aid (accompanied by a display
message and a chime), bring your vehicle to
a complete stop.
When automatic steering is complete, the
system displays a message and a tone
sounds, indicating that the active park assist
process is finished. You are responsible for
checking the parking job and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Using Active Park Assist - Park Out Assist
E146186
While your vehicle is at rest in a
parallel parking space, press the
active park assist button.
The system displays a message requesting
an indication of direction. Use the direction
indicator to signal which side of your vehicle
you want to exit the parking space.
E188012
The system determines the clearance to the
front and rear of your vehicle and
automatically steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space (hands-free) while you
control the accelerator, gearshift and brakes.
The system visually and audibly guides you
to enter traffic.
After the system has directed your vehicle
past the adjacent vehicle or object, it guides
you to take control of the steering to
complete the exit from the parking spot.
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front bumper
and the parking space (a pedestrian or
cyclist) or if the edge of the neighboring
parked vehicle is high off the ground (for
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck).
214
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
Note: If the clearance in front of your vehicle
allows easy departure, the Park Out Assist
feature might not be available.
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.
Note: This system is not intended to assist
in exiting perpendicular parking spaces,
damages to your vehicle may occur.
Note: If your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(9 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input), the system switches off and
you need to take full control of your vehicle.
Deactivating the Active Park Assist
Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button
twice.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an active
park search.
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
automatic steering.
• Switching off the traction control system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message displays accompanied by
a tone. Occasional system messages may
occur in normal operation. For recurring or
frequent system faults, contact an authorized
dealer to have your vehicle serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse ( R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
215
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered senors can affect the system's functionality.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (0.4 m) away.
The transmission is in reverse ( R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel and 19 mph (30 km/h) for perpendicular parking.
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward with reverse [R] selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
You pulled your vehicle too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
216
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that still
requires the driver to use it in conjunction
with the interior and exterior mirrors for
maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper,
might not be seen on the screen due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your reaction
time to stop your vehicle.
WARNINGS
Use caution when using the rear video
camera and the luggage compartment
door is ajar. If the luggage compartment door
is ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display
which represent your vehicle’s path and
proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in reverse (R).
217
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another object
behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of your
vehicle with an object (for example, a
trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and
the luggage compartment door or liftgate is
open, no rear view camera features will
display.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to become
misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
218
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the
steering wheel to point the guidelines toward
an intended path. If you change the steering
wheel position while reversing, your vehicle
might deviate from the original intended
path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not display
when the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle
and objects in the green zone are farther
away. Objects are getting closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of the
vehicle.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full area
behind your vehicle may not show. Be
aware of your surroundings when using the
manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom
in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol in
the camera screen to change the view. The
default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in reverse (R).
Camera System Settings
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the multifunctional display when
the transmission is not in reverse (R):
Main Menu
Settings
Vehicle
Camera Settings
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
219
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
The default setting for the rear camera delay
is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
360 DEGREE PARKING AID
CAMERA (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The 360 degree camera system is a
supplement system that still requires
the driver to use it in conjunction with looking
out the windows, and checking the interior
and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
You may not see objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper due to the limited coverage of
the camera system.
Use caution when turning camera
features ON or OFF while out of park
(P). Make sure your vehicle is not moving.
WARNINGS
Failure to take care may result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
The 360 degree camera system consists of
front, side and rear cameras. The system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in front
or behind your vehicle.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
• Allows you to see a top-down view of the
area outside your vehicle, including the
blind spots.
• Provides visibility around your vehicle to
you in parking maneuvers such as:
• Centering in a parking space.
• Obstacles near vehicle.
• Parallel parking.
E205884
The 360 degree camera system
button is located on the instrument
panel and allows you to toggle
through different camera views.
The front and rear cameras have multiple
screens which consist of: Normal view with
360, Normal view, and split view. When in
park (P), neutral (N) or drive (D), only the front
images will be displayed when the button is
pressed. When in reverse (R), only the rear
images will be displayed when the button is
pressed.
Note: The 360 degree camera system will
turn OFF when your vehicle is in motion at
low speed, except when in reverse (R).
Camera Views
The small vehicle icon displayed on the top
left corner of the image illustrates the camera
view being displayed. Camera views are laid
out in the order the screens will appear once
the button is pressed.
Note: The front video image will be disabled
when your vehicle is in motion at low speed,
except when in reverse (R).
220
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
• Front 360 + Normal: Contains the normal
front camera view next to a 360 degree
camera view. This view will appear on
the screen when the button is pressed
in any gear other than reverse (R).
• Front Normal View: Provides an image
of what is directly in front of your vehicle.
Access this view by pressing the camera
button from the Front 360 + Normal View
screen.
• Front Split View: Provides an extended
view of what is in front of your vehicle.
Access this view by pressing the camera
button from the Front Normal View
screen.
• Rear 360 + Normal: Contains the normal
rear camera view next to a 360 degree
camera view. This view can be accessed
by putting your vehicle in reverse (R), or
by pressing the camera button from the
Rear Split View screen.
• Rear Normal View: Provides an image
of what is directly behind your vehicle.
Access this view by pressing the camera
button from the Rear 360 + Normal
screen.
• Rear Split View: Provides an extended
view of what is behind your vehicle.
Access this view by pressing the camera
button from the Rear Normal View
screen.
Keep Out Zone
E184448
The Keep Out Zone is represented by the
yellow dotted lines running parallel to your
vehicle. It is designed to give you the
indication on the ground of the fully
extended outside mirror position.
Front Camera
WARNING
The front camera system is an aid
supplement device that still requires
the driver to use it in conjunction with looking
out your vehicle.
E197234
221
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
The front video camera, located behind the
star emblem on the grille, provides a video
image of the area in front of your vehicle. It
adds assistance to the driver while driving
forward at low speeds. To use the front video
camera system, place the transmission in any
gear except reverse (R). An image will display
once the camera enable button is pressed.
The area displayed on the screen may vary
according to your vehicle's orientation and/or
road condition.
Note: Keep the star emblem free from snow,
ice and large accumulations of dirt. If
something is blocking the star emblem from
moving, the camera will not deploy.
Side Camera
The side view camera, located in the outside
mirror, provides a video image of the area
on the sides of your vehicle as part of the
front 360 + normal view and rear 360 +
normal view. It aids you while parking your
vehicle either forward or backwards.
Note: Use caution when using the 360 view
while any of the doors are ajar. If a door is
ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect.
222
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the road
surface is slippery. This could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above the
set speed. The system will not apply the
brakes but a warning displays. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
To help the system to maintain the set speed
when going downhill, downshift to a lower
gear.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
E145976
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator changes color in the instrument
cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the information display,
the set speed changes in approximately
2 km/h increments. When you select mph
as the display measurement in the
information display, the set speed
changes in approximately 1 mph
increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
223
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Cruise Control
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system is
in stand by mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to changing
road conditions, especially when using
adaptive cruise control. Adaptive cruise
control cannot replace attentive driving.
Failing to follow any of the warnings below
or failing to pay attention to the road may
result in a crash, serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
stationary or slow moving vehicles
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control
when entering or leaving a highway, in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
slippery or unpaved.
Do not use in poor visibility, specifically
fog, rain, spray or snow.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The system adjusts your speed to maintain
a proper distance between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select from one of four gap settings.
E195438
The controls for using your cruise control are
located on the steering wheel.
Switching the System On
Press and release ON.
E144529
The information display shows the
grey indicator light.
E164805
224
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Cruise Control
The current gap setting and SET also display.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+. The vehicle
speed is stored in the memory.
3. The information display shows a green
indicator light, current gap setting and
desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
E164805
5. A lead vehicle graphic illuminates when
the system detects a vehicle in front of
you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer may vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the information
display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle in front of
you, your vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does your vehicle
always decelerate quickly enough to avoid
a crash without driver intervention. Always
apply the brakes when necessary. Failing to
do so may result in a crash, serious injury or
death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns of
radar-sensor-detected vehicles. In
some cases there may be no warning or a
delayed warning. You should always apply
the brakes when necessary. Failing to do so
may result in a crash, serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound when
the adaptive cruise control system is active.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the
same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to
maintain a preset gap distance. The distance
setting is adjustable.
The lead vehicle graphic illuminates.
When you are following a vehicle and you
switch on your left directional indicator,
adaptive cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
The vehicle maintains a constant distance
between the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of
your lane or out of view.
• The vehicle speed falls below 12 mph (20
km/h).
• A new gap distance is set.
The vehicle applies brakes to slow the
vehicle to maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front. The maximum braking which
the system can apply is limited. You can
override the system by applying the brakes.
If the system predicts that its maximum
braking level is insufficient, an audible
warning sounds while the system continues
to brake. The red warning bar appears on
the windshield. You should take immediate
action.
225
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Cruise Control
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
E195439
A
B
Gap decrease.A
Gap increase.B
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you by pressing the gap control.
E164805
The selected gap appears in the information
display as shown by the bars in the graphic.
Four gap distance settings are available.
Adaptive cruise control, distance between vehicle settings
Dynamic behaviorDistance gapTime gap, secondsGraphic display, bars indic-
ated between vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport.31 (28)1162 (100)
Normal.43 (39)1.4262 (100)
Normal.55 (50)1.8362 (100)
Comfort.67 (61)2.2462 (100)
226
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Cruise Control
Each time you start the vehicle, the system
selects the last chosen gap for the current
driver.
Disengaging the System
Press the brake pedal or press and release
CNCL. The last set speed displays in grey
but does not erase.
Overriding the System
WARNING
Whenever the driver presses the
accelerator pedal and overrides the
system, the system does not automatically
apply the brakes to maintain the set distance
from any vehicle ahead.
Press the accelerator pedal to override the
set speed and gap distance.
E144529
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the lead vehicle
graphic does not show in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
slower speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
• Accelerate or brake to the desired speed,
then press and release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the
desired set speed shows on the
information display. The vehicle speed
gradually changes to the selected speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The set
speed changes in approximately 1 mph
(2 km/h) increments.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Press and release RES. The vehicle returns
to the previously set speed. The set speed
displays continuously in the information
display while the system is active.
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation
The system does not function at speeds
below 12 mph (20 km/h). An audible alarm
sounds and the automatic braking releases
if your vehicle drops below this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it is applying brakes
for an extended period of time. This allows
the brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again when the brakes cool.
Select a lower gear during prolonged
downhill driving on steep slopes, such as
mountainous areas, when the system is
active. In such situations, the system needs
additional engine braking to reduce the load
on the vehicle’s regular brake system to
prevent the brakes from overheating.
227
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Cruise Control
Switching the System Off
Press and release OFF when the system is
in stand by mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: The set speed memory erases when
you switch off the system.
Detection Issues
WARNING
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels
and safety barriers. In these cases, the
system may brake late or unexpectedly. At
all times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required.
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
With vehicles that edge into your
lane that can only be detected
once they have moved fully into
your lane.
A
Motorcyclists may be detected
late, or not at all.
B
With vehicles in front of you when
going into and coming out of a
bend. The detection beam will not
follow sharp curves in the road.
C
In these cases the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver should stay alert
and intervene when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detections. See an authorized
dealer to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
228
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Cruise Control
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
WARNINGS
Do not use the system when towing a
trailer with brake controls. Aftermarket
trailer brakes do not function properly when
you switch the system on because the
brakes are electronically controlled. Failing
to do so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury. The
system does operate with non-electronic
trailer brake controllers, such as over-run or
surge brakes.
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can affect
the normal operation of the system. Failing
to do so may result in a loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury.
E145632
A message appears if something obstructs
the sensor's radar signals. The sensor is
located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. The system cannot detect
a vehicle ahead and does not function when
something obstructs the radar signal. The
following table lists possible causes and
actions for this message displaying.
229
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Cruise Control
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is free from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control.You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no
roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example,
when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition
either self clears or clears after a you restart
your vehicle.
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control does not brake
for slower vehicles. Always be aware
of which mode you have selected and apply
the brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, the system does not
automatically respond to lead vehicles and
automatic braking does not activate.
230
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed to
aid you. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are still
responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system will
be active at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
When below the activation speed, the
information display will inform the driver that
the system is unavailable.
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using a
chime and a message in the cluster display.
USING DRIVER ALERT
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 114).
When activated, the system will monitor your
alertness level based upon your driving
behavior in relation to the lane markings, and
other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system has two stages. At first,
the system issues a temporary warning that
you need to take a rest. This message will
only appear for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving alertness,
it may issue another warning that will remain
in the information display for a longer time.
You can press OK on the steering wheel
control to clear the warning.
System Display
When active the system will run automatically
in the background and only issue a warning
if required. You can view the status at any
time using the information display. See
General Information (page 114).
The alertness level is shown by six steps in
a colored bar.
E131358
231
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
The current assessment of your alertness is
within a typical range.
E131359
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar will travel from left to right as
the calculated alertness level decreases. As
the rest icon is approached the color turns
from green to yellow to red.
The yellow position indicates the first
warning is active and the red position
indicates the second warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning; you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is within the typical
range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h), the alertness level will change to
grey for a short time and the information
display will inform you that the system is
unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if required.
If the sensor becomes blocked the
system may not function.
WARNINGS
In cold and severe weather conditions
the system may not function. Rain,
snow, spray can all limit sensor performance.
Large contrasts in lighting can limit
sensor performance.
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
The vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer for inspection if
damage occurs in the immediate area
surrounding the sensor.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
232
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short period,
the system will alert you to put your hands
on the steering wheel. The system may
detect a light grip or touch on the steering
wheel as hands off driving.
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out of
your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey
it defaults to on and the mode is set to Alert.
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system.
E144813
Press the button located on the left
steering wheel stalk to switch the
system on or off.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. To view or adjust the settings, See
General Information (page 114). The system
stores the last-known selection for each of
these settings. You do not need to readjust
your settings each time you turn on the
system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select which
of the system features you can enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
E165516
Aid only – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center when
the system detects an unintended lane
departure.
233
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center. If your
vehicle continues drifting out of the lane, the
system provides a steering wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of
the steering wheel vibration used for the alert
and alert + aid modes. This setting does not
affect the aid mode.
• Low
• Normal
• High
System Display
E151660
When you switch on the system, an overhead
graphic of a vehicle with lane markings will
display in the information display. If you
select aid mode when you switch on the
system, a separate white icon will also
appear or in some vehicles arrows will
display with the lane markings.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
While the system is on, the color of the lane
markings will change to indicate the system
status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily
unable to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side(s). This may be
because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The turn indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog), traffic conditions (following a large
vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the
lane), or vehicle conditions (poor
headlamp illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
234
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
Green: Indicates that the system is available
or ready to provide a warning or intervention,
on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping aid
intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using the turn signal indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
The last Alert warning or Aid intervention occurred a short time ago
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
235
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been modified
236
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS™)
with Cross Traffic Alert (If Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The Blind
Spot Information System is not a replacement
for careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System aids you
in detecting vehicles that may have entered
the blind spot zone (A). The detection area
is on both sides of your vehicle, extending
rearward from the exterior mirrors to
approximately 23 ft (7 m) beyond the bumper.
The system alerts you if certain vehicles
enter the blind spot zone while driving.
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the cross traffic alert system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross traffic alert is not a replacement
for careful driving.
Cross traffic alert warns you of vehicles
approaching from the sides when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor does it detect parked
vehicles, people, animals or infrastructure
(fences, guardrails or trees). It only alerts you
to vehicles in the blind zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through
the blind zone, the system may not trigger.
Using the Systems
The Blind Spot Information System turns on
when you start the engine and you drive your
vehicle forward above 5 mph (8 km/h), it
remains on while the transmission is in drive
(D) or neutral (N). If shifted into reverse (R),
the system enters cross traffic alert mode.
Once shifted back into drive (D), the Blind
Spot Information System turns back on when
you drive your vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
Note: Cross traffic alert detects approaching
vehicles and bicycles from up to 131 ft (40 m)
away though coverage decreases when the
sensors are blocked. Reversing slowly helps
increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
237
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
Note: For manual transmission vehicles, the
cross traffic alert will be active only if the
transmission is in reverse (R). If your vehicle
is rolling backward and the transmission is
not in reverse (R) then cross traffic alert will
not be active.
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage is nearly
maximized.
238
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is
mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that
side is severely limited.
239
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information and cross traffic
alert systems illuminate a yellow alert
indicator in the outside mirror on the side of
your vehicle the approaching vehicle is
coming from. In addition, the yellow alert
indicator will flash if the direction indicator is
ON while a Blind Spot Warning System alert
is active.
Cross traffic alert also sounds a series of
tones and a message appears in the
information display indicating a vehicle is
coming from the right or left.
System Sensors
WARNING
Just prior to the system recognizing a
blocked condition and alerting the
driver, the number of missed objects will
increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER use
the Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the side and rear view
mirrors and looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
Note: It is possible to get a blockage warning
with no blockage present; this is rare and
known as a false blockage warning. A false
blocked condition either self-corrects or
clears after a key cycle.
E205199
240
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
The system uses radar sensors which are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow
or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas,
this can cause degraded system
performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor or low visibility will
appear in the information display along with
a warning indicator. You can clear the
information display warning but the warning
indicator will remain illuminated.
When you remove a blockage, you can reset
the system in two ways:
• While driving, the system detects at least
two objects.
• You cycle the ignition from on to off and
then back on.
If the blockage is still present after the key
cycle and driving in traffic, check again for a
blockage.
Reasons for messages being displayed
Clean the fascia area in front
of the radar or remove the
obstruction.
The radar
surface is
dirty or
obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for a
few minutes to allow the
radar to detect passing
vehicles so it can clear the
blocked state.
The radar
surface is
not dirty or
obstructed
No action required. The
system automatically resets
to an unblocked state once
the rainfall or snowfall rate
decreases or stops. Do not
use the Blind Spot Informa-
tion System or cross traffic
alert in these conditions.
Heavy rain-
fall or snow-
fall inter-
feres with
the radar
signals
System Limitations
The Blind Spot Information and cross traffic
alert systems do have their limitations;
situations such as severe weather conditions
or debris build-up on the sensor area may
limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Blind Spot Information System:
• Vehicles passing through the blind zone
at very quickly.
• When several vehicles closely following
each other pass through the blind zone.
The following are other situations that may
limit the cross traffic alert system:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at speeds
greater than 37 mph (60 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
241
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
False Alerts
Note: If your vehicle has a factory equipped
tow bar and it is towing a trailer, the sensors
will detect the trailer and turn the Blind Spot
Information and cross traffic alert systems
off to avoid false alerts. For non-factory
equipped tow bars, you may want to switch
the Blind Spot Information System off
manually.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by either the Blind Spot
Information or the cross traffic alert system
that illuminates the alert indicator with no
vehicle in the coverage zone. Some amount
of false alerts are normal; they are temporary
and self-correct.
System Errors
If either system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the Blind Spot Information
System telltale will illuminate and a message
will appear in the information display.
All other system faults will display only with
a message in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 121).
Switching the Systems Off and On
You can temporarily switch off one or both
systems in the information display. See
General Information (page 114). When you
switch off the Blind Spot Information System,
you will not receive alerts and the information
display shows a system off message.
Note: The cross traffic alert system always
turns on whenever the ignition is switched
on. However, the Blind Spot Information
System will remember the last selected on
or off setting.
You cannot switch one or both systems off
when MyKey is used. See Principle of
Operation (page 60).
You can also have one or both systems
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off, only an authorized
dealer can switch the system back on.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING
The electric power steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously
monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a
message displays in the information display.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and watch
the information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
242
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST
WARNINGS
You are responsible for controlling your
vehicle at all times. The system does
not relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNINGS
To achieve full system performance
you must break in the braking system.
See General Information (page 194). Failure
to take care may result in the loss of control
of your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.
The system does not react to cyclists,
animals, pedestrians at night, or
vehicles that are driving in a different
direction. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
The system does not operate during
harsh acceleration or steering. Failure
to take care may lead to a crash or personal
injury.
The system may or may not operate or
may operate with reduced function
during cold or severe weather conditions.
Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can influence
the system. Keep the front camera and radar
free of snow and ice. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
243
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
WARNINGS
System performance may reduce in
situations where the camera's
detection capability is limited. These
situations include but are not limited to direct
or low sunlight, vehicles at night without tail
lights, unconventional vehicle types,
pedestrians with complex backgrounds,
running pedestrians, partly obscured
pedestrians, or pedestrians which cannot be
distinguished from a group. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
The system cannot help prevent all
collisions. Do not rely on this system
to replace driver judgment and the need to
maintain distance and speed.
The pre-collision assist system's brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if the driver
applies the vehicle's brakes. The brake pedal
must be pressed just like any typical braking
situation.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist System
The Pre-Collision Assist system is active at
speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h)
and pedestrian detection is active at speeds
up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
E156130
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching another
stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the
same direction as yours, or a pedestrian
within your driving path, the system is design
to provide three levels of functionality:
1. Alert
2. Brake Support
3. Active Braking
E156131
Alert: When activated, a red warning light
flashes, an audible warning chime sounds
and a warning message shows in the
information display.
Brake Support: The brake support system
assists the driver in reducing the collision
speed by lightly applying the brakes. If the
risk of collision further increases after the
warning light illuminates, the brake support
prepares the brake system for rapid braking.
This may be apparent to the driver. The
system does not automatically activate the
brakes, but if you press the brake pedal, the
system may apply full force, even if the brake
pedal is lightly pressed.
Active Braking: Active braking may activate
if the system determines that a collision is
imminent. The system may help the driver
reduce impact damage or avoid the crash
completely.
244
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends using
the highest sensitivity setting where possible.
Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer
and later system warnings.
Blocked Sensors
E145632
If a message regarding a blocked sensor or
camera appears in the information display,
the radar signals or camera images are
obstructed. The radar sensor is located
behind a fascia cover near the driver side of
the lower grille. With an obstructed radar,
the Pre-Collision Assist system does not
function and cannot detect a vehicle ahead.
With the front camera obstructed, the
Pre-Collision Assist system does not respond
to pedestrians or stationary vehicles and the
system performance on moving vehicles
reduces. The following table lists possible
causes and actions for when this message
displays.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that there is no obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-Collision
Assist should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather
conditions improve.
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering with the radar signals.
245
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
ActionCause
The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-Collision
Assist should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather
conditions improve.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end impact.
Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to detect
that there is no obstruction.
The windshield in front of the camera is clean but the message remains
in the display.
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing
zone may change. This could cause missed
or false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message may display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. This message
deactivates automatically when operational
conditions are corrected (for example, when
the ambient temperature around the sensor
decreases or the sensor automatically
recalibrates successfully).
DRIVE CONTROL (If Equipped)
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL
Lincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincoln
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering, handling,
powertrain response and sound. You can
246
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
preset your preferences for these systems
within the information display. Lincoln Drive
Control will respond to your preferences
based on what gear position you select. This
provides a single location to control multiple
systems performance settings.
Lincoln Drive Control consists of the
following systems:
• Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock absorbers
stiffness in real time to match the road
surface and driver inputs. This system
continuously monitors your vehicle’s
motion (roll, pitch, bounce), suspension
position, load, speed, road conditions,
and steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based on
your vehicle speed and your inputs.
• Adaptive steering optimizes your
vehicle's steering response based on
your steering wheel input, changes in
vehicle speed and other conditions.
• Active noise control utilizes your vehicle
electronics to enhance the acoustic
experience.
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving.
• Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your inputs.
Using Lincoln Drive Control
You can configure which of the Drive Control
modes are active when your vehicle is in
drive (D) or in Sport (S). The configuration
remains active until modified from the main
menu on the information display.
These systems have a range of modes which
you can choose from in order to customize
your ideal driving experience:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the composure
demanded from a luxury vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens, with
an emphasis on handling and control.
The engine responds more directly to
your inputs and takes on a more powerful
tone. Sport mode is ideal for use during
more spirited driving.
247
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
You can change your vehicle’s Drive
Control settings from the main menu on
the information display:
Settings
Drive ControlVehicle
Note: Not all settings may be available.
Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system
to ensure proper operation. Certain types of
system errors will gray out the mode
selections within the information display,
preventing you from changing states when
the gear position is changed. Other types of
errors will produce a temporary message
that states Drive Control Malfunction. If either
condition persists for multiple key cycles,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
248
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Aids
REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE
Cargo Management System
E201718
The system is located in the floor of the
cargo area. Lift the handle to open.
High series
E201719
The high series has an additional cover that
can be removed to access the spare tire or
tire mobility kit.
In-floor storage - second row
E201721
In-floor storage is located behind the second
row of seats in the cargo area. Lift the strap
to open.
CARGO NETS
WARNING
This net is not designed to restrain
objects during a collision or heavy
braking.
249
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
The cargo net secures lightweight objects
in the cargo area. Attach the net to the
anchors provided. Repeat the attachment on
both sides of the vehicle.
E199571
LUGGAGE COVERS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Make sure that the posts are correctly
latched in mounting features. The
cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or
crash if it is not securely installed.
Do not place any objects on the cargo
shade. They may obstruct your vision
or strike occupants of your vehicle in a
sudden stop or crash.
Use the cargo shade to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
E159183
Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the
mounting features located behind the rear
seat on the rear trim panels to install the
shade.
To operate the cargo shade:
1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade
rearward until it clicks into place.
2. To close the cargo shade, tap on the rear
edge and it will slide forward.
250
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS (If Equipped)
WARNING
When loading the roof racks, we
recommend you evenly distribute the
load, as well as maintain a low center of
gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers
of gravity, may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the roof rack, is 100 lb (45 kg).
Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
panel. The roof panel is not designed to
directly carry a load.
You must place loads directly on the
crossbars fitted to the roof rack side rails.
When using the roof rack system, we
recommend that you use genuine Ford
accessory crossbars specifically designed
for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the load.
Check the tightness of the load before
driving and at each fuel stop.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, trailer or both,
to keep your loaded vehicle weight
within its design rating capability, with
or without a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum return of
vehicle design performance. Before
loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or
without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire
Label or Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight of the
vehicle including a full tank of fuel and
all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the weight of
your new vehicle when you picked it up
from your authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
251
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight of
cargo and passengers that the vehicle
is carrying. The maximum payload for
your vehicle can be found on the Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED
WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR
XXX lb.” for maximum payload. The
payload listed on the Tire Label is the
maximum payload for the vehicle as built
by the assembly plant. If you install any
aftermarket or authorized-dealer
installed equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on
the Tire Label in order to determine the
new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading capacity
of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
252
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
Example only:
E142516
E142517
253
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
E143817
CARGO
Cargo Weight - includes all weight
added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment.
When towing, trailer tongue load or king
pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is the total
weight placed on each axle (front and
rear) including vehicle curb weight and
all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - is
the maximum allowable weight that can
be carried by a single axle (front or rear).
These numbers are shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position. The
total load on each axle must never
exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at an authorized dealer.
254
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - is the
Vehicle Curb Weight, plus cargo, plus
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
- is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). It is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position. The
Gross Vehicle Weight must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating.
255
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
Example only:
E142523
256
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
E142524
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety Compliance
Certification Label vehicle weight
rating limits could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance, engine,
transmission and/or structural damage,
serious damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
257
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
E143819
GCW
GVW
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) - is the
Gross Vehicle Weight plus the weight of
the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded
trailer, including all cargo and
passengers, that the vehicle can handle
without risking damage. (Important: The
towing vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight
Rating.) Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the Gross
Combined Weight of the towing vehicle
plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight - is
the highest possible weight of a fully
loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It
assumes a vehicle with mandatory
options, driver and front passenger
weight (150 pounds [68 kilograms] each),
no cargo weight (internal or external)
and a tongue load of 10–15%
(conventional trailer) or king pin weight
of 15–25% (fifth wheel trailer). Consult
an authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at an
authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin
Weight - refers to the amount of the
weight that a trailer pushes down on a
trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5000 pound (2268
kilogram) conventional trailer, multiply
5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper
tongue load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an 11500
pound (5216 kilogram) fifth wheel trailer,
multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a
proper king pin load range of 1725 to
2875 pounds (782 to 1304 kilograms).
258
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than
the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not
increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or
personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb." on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb.
and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples
on how to calculate the available amount
of cargo and luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is
there enough load capacity to carry you,
four of your friends and all the golf bags?
You and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf
bags weigh approximately 30 pounds
(13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation
would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 -
495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
259
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends
decide to pick up cement from the local
home improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded
down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of
cement. Do you have enough load
capacity to transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240
pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 -
198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation
would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In metric
units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that
the loads are positioned in your vehicle
in a manner that does not overload the
Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating specified for your vehicle on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating position.
Special Loading Instructions for
Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-
type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles.
Extra precautions, such as slower
speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving
a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and
people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and
placement of the load, hauling cargo
and people may raise the center of
gravity of the vehicle.
260
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the certification
label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays, related
to towing. See Fuses (page 284).
Your vehicle's load capacity designation
is by weight, not by volume, so you
cannot necessarily use all available
space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on
your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect
these components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects your vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered
between the left and right side trailer
tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a tow bar with the correct rise
or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the
trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may
be present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in the
Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 251).
You can also find information in the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.
261
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature except
in situations where speed reduction may be
detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver
has significant trailer towing experience, and
can control trailer sway and maintain safe
operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too
high, the system may activate multiple times,
gradually reducing vehicle speed.
This feature applies your vehicle brakes at
individual wheels and, if necessary, reduces
engine power. If the trailer begins to sway,
the stability control light flashes and the
message TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED
appears in the information display. The first
thing to do is slow your vehicle down, then
pull safely to the side of the road and check
for proper tongue load and trailer load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page 249).
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight
for your vehicle configuration listed in
the chart below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area. Do not
exceed 20 ft² (1.86 m²) for vehicles
without towing package, or 30 ft² (2.79
m²) for vehicles with towing package.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1,000 ft (305 m) starting at the
1,000 ft (305 m) elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric
trailer brakes for trailers over a specified
weight. Be sure to check state
regulations for this specified weight. The
maximum trailer weights listed may be
limited to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector needed to
activate electric trailer brakes.
262
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Towing
Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided
the maximum trailer weight is less than
or equal to the maximum trailer weight
listed for your vehicle configuration on
the following chart.
Maximum trailer weight
1
Powertrain
2,000 lb (907 kg)
2.7L GTDI
2
3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
2.7L GTDI
3
2,000 lb (907 kg)
3.5L TiVCT
2
3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
3.5L TiVCT
3
1
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
2
Vehicle without towing package.
3
Vehicle with towing package.
263
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 251).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your vehicle's
brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of
having a collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system resulting
in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible for assistance in proper
trailer tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
264
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Towing
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included
with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 inches (15 centimeters) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
265
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Towing
Any time the rear axle submerges in water,
replace the rear axle lubricant. Water may
contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which is
not a normal maintenance inspection item
unless there is a possibility of a leak or other
axle repair is required.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or, if
you are a member of a roadside assistance
program, your roadside assistance service
provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt
towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other
means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front
wheels off the ground. When towing in this
manner, the rear wheels can remain on the
ground.
266
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Towing
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage
to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
Emergency Towing
You can flat-tow (all wheels on the ground,
regardless of the powertrain/transmission
configuration) your disabled vehicle (without
access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer,
or flatbed transport vehicle) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward so you tow
it in a forward direction.
• You place the transmission in position N.
If you cannot place the transmission in
position N, you may need to override it.
See Transmission (page 182).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80
kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 140).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are to make sure you do not
damage the transmission during towing.
You can tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground using the Neutral Tow feature,
or with all four wheels off the ground using
a vehicle transport trailer. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the instruction
specified by the equipment provider.
Neutral Tow
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
Enter Neutral Tow mode by doing the
following:
1. Put the ignition in accessory mode by
pressing the engine START button
without pressing the brake pedal.
267
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Towing
2. Select Neutral Tow under the Vehicle
Settings menu in the information display.
See General Information (page 114).
3. Press and hold the OK button to start the
neutral tow process.
4. Press the brake pedal and select N on
the push-button transmission.
5. Turn the ignition off by pressing the
engine START button without pressing
the brake pedal.
If the process is completes successfully:
• the N on the push-button transmission
blinks slowly
• Neutral Tow Engaged turn ignition off
for towing appears in the information
display.
Note: If the parking brake is applied, Neutral
Tow remove park brake for towing appears
in the information display.
Note: Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
Note: Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each day
and every six hours (or fewer). Shut the
engine off and verify that Neutral tow
engaged appears in the display before
continuing to tow.
Exit Neutral Tow mode, make sure the
ignition is on (engine can be on or off), press
the brake pedal and select P on the
push-button transmission.
If the process is completed successfully,
Neutral Tow disengaged appears in the
information display and both the instrument
cluster and push-button transmission display
P.
268
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers).
During this time, your vehicle may exhibit
some unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the gears
early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
REDUCED ENGINE PERFORMANCE
WARNING
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and cause the
engine to shut down completely.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
needle moves to the upper limit position, the
engine is overheating. See Gauges (page
107).
You must only drive your vehicle for a short
distance if the engine overheats. The
distance you can travel depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain. The
engine will continue to operate with limited
power for a short time.
If the engine temperature continues to rise,
the fuel supply to the engine will reduce. The
air conditioning will switch off and the engine
cooling fan will operate continually.
1. Reduce your speed gradually and stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
2. Switch the engine off immediately to
prevent severe engine damage.
3. Wait for the engine to cool down.
4. Check the coolant level. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 309).
5. Have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• When running errands, go to the
furthest destination first and then
work your way back home.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds. (Traveling
at 65 mph/105 kph uses about 15% less
fuel than traveling at 75 mph/121 kph).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
269
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Hints
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want to
avoid doing because they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 kilometers/liter]
is lost for every 400 lbs [180 kilograms]
of weight carried).
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the front rocker
area of your vehicle.
E176360
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
270
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Hints
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the
pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats
that are firmly secured to retention posts so
that they cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
Always make sure that the floor mats
are properly attached to the retention
posts in the carpet that are supplied with
your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly
secured to both retention posts to make sure
mats do not shift out of position.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to prevent them
from moving and interfering with the pedals
or the ability to control the vehicle.
WARNINGS
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on
top of vehicle carpeting surface and not
another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on a
regular basis. Always properly reinstall
and secure floor mats that have been
removed for cleaning or replacement.
Always make sure that objects cannot
fall into the driver foot well while the
vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can
become trapped under the pedals causing
a loss of vehicle control.
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment instructions
can potentially cause interference with pedal
operation causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
271
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold In the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
If you ever need help on the road, the Lincoln
Motor Company is there for you with
nationwide, 24-hours-a-day,
seven-days-a-week assistance.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 70,000 mi
(112,654.08 km) (whichever comes first)
within the extended powertrain warranty
coverage period for subsequent owners.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
This complimentary Roadside Assistance
program is separate from the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and includes:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2.0 gal (7.5 L) of gasoline or 5.0 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.48 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (161 km) of
the disablement location or to the nearest
Lincoln dealer. If a client requests a tow
to a selling or preferred dealer that is
more than 100 mi (161 km) from the
disablement location, the client shall be
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (161 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
coverage for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is not,
then the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold In the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States Lincoln vehicle clients who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company will
reimburse a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within
100 mi (161 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Lincoln vehicle
clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Ford Motor
Company will ask you to submit your original
receipts.
272
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian clients who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-387-9333.
Sykes Assistance Services Corporation
administers the Roadside Assistance
program. You must receive covered services
in Canada or the continental United States.
Coverage extends to vehicles that use public,
non-seasonal, annually traveled roadways.
Roadside Assistance coverage does not
extend to vehicles involved in cross-country
driving, logging, autocross and any other
form of off-road use. Well maintained roads
and surfaces help ensure safe travel for the
Supplier, and allow their representatives to
perform service as per the standard
operating procedures.
In Remote Locations
If our supplier cannot take your vehicle by
road to the nearest authorized dealership,
transportation by rail or water may be
necessary. The program covers a tow to the
dock or rail terminal and also to the
dealership at the end of the trip.
For rail or water transportation, however,
contact your authorized dealer to confirm if
you are eligible for additional coverage
before you authorize or pay for the service.
Call the Lincoln Roadside Assistance at
1-800-387-9333 for additional information.
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the United States coverage.
Please refer to your warranty information or
visit our website at www.lincolncanada.com
for information on Canadian services and
benefits.
Canadian clients who need to obtain
roadside information, call 1-800-387-9333 or
visit our website at www.lincolncanada.com.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will lose charge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the
fuel system be inspected by an authorized
dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel to
the engine. Not every impact will cause a
shutoff.
273
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Roadside Emergencies
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision,
you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles
equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to switch
off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the engine
by pressing the brake pedal and the
START/STOP button, or switch on the
ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without pressing
the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the
fuel system.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not
restart after your third attempt, contact an
authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or
lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield
your face and protect your eyes. Always
provide correct ventilation.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield
your eyes when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Use only adequately sized cables with
insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic
transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with
an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
274
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Roadside Emergencies
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components as
grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts.
To avoid reverse polarity connections, make
sure that you correctly identify the positive
(+) and negative (-) terminals on both the
disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+) terminal of
your vehicle’s battery. High current may flow
through and cause damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the
battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, away from the
battery and the fuel injection system, or
connect the negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
275
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle
battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators will turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the remote
entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
276
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made
using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are
available online at www.lincolnowner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.ford.ca
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA
277
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Customer Assistance
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling/servicing
authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies, please
contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify Ford
in writing before pursuing remedies under
your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an
amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive
a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000
miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
278
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Customer Assistance
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the need
for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing
rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S.
ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
279
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Customer Assistance
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’ s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
280
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Customer Assistance
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than
is recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without
proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or
Ford of Canada is not responsible for any
damage caused by use of improper fuel.
Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the United
States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth
of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI),
America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands,
please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia:
8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
281
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Customer Assistance
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Motor
Company Export Operations & Global Growth
Initiatives by emailing [email protected].
If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’ s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S
LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by
their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, Incorporated using the contact
information listed previously in this section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford
Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
Ford Motor Company.
282
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Transport Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htmWebsite
1–800–333–0510Phone
283
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.
WARNINGS
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the power
distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in the
engine compartment. It has high-current
fuses that protect your vehicle's main
electrical systems from overloads.
If you disconnect or reconnect the battery,
some features need to be reset. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 316).
284
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
E190797
285
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay Number
Power fold 2nd row seats.
30A
3
1
Starter relay.—2
Rear wiper.
15A
1
3
Rain sensor
Blower motor relay.—4
Power point 3 - back of console.
20A
3
5
Not used.—6
Powertrain control module - vehicle power 1.
20A
1
7
Powertrain control module - vehicle power 2.
20A
1
8
Powertrain control module relay.—9
Power point 1 - driver front.
20A
3
10
Powertrain control module - vehicle power 4.
15A
2
11
Powertrain control module - vehicle power 3.
15A
2
12
286
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay Number
Not used.—13
Not used.—14
Run-start relay.—15
Power point 2 - console bin.
20A
3
16
Power point 4 - luggage compartment.
20A
3
17
RH HID headlamp.
20A
1
18
Run-start electronic power assist steering.
10A
1
19
Run/start lighting.
10A
1
20
Transmission oil pump logic power (start/stop).
15A
1
21
Air conditioner clutch solenoid.
10A
1
22
Run-start 6.
15A
1
23
Blind spot information system.
Rear view camera.
Adaptive cruise control.
Heads-up display.
287
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay Number
Voltage quality module (start/stop).
Front split view camera.
Front split view camera module.
Not used (spare).
10A
1
24
Run-start anti-lock brake system.
10A
2
25
Run-start powertrain control module.
10A
2
26
Not used.—27
Rear washer pump.
10A
1
28
Not used.—29
Not used.—30
Not used.—31
Electronic fan 1 relay.—32
A/C clutch relay.—33
Glove box release.
15A
1
34
Not used.—35
288
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay Number
Not used.—36
Power transfer unit fan.
10A
1
37
Electronic fan 2 relay.—38
Electric fan 3 relay.—39
Horn relay.—40
Not used.—41
Fuel pump relay.—42
2nd row easy fold seat release.
10A
1
43
LH HID headlamp.
20A
1
44
Not used.—45
Not used.—46
Not used.—47
Not used.—48
Not used.—49
289
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected ComponentsFuse Amp RatingFuse or Relay Number
Horn.
20A
1
50
Not used.—51
Not used.—52
Not used.—53
Brake on off switch.
10A
2
54
ALT sensor.
10A
2
55
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
M-type fuse.
Power Distribution Box - Bottom
There are fuses located on the bottom of the
fuse box. To access the bottom of the fuse
box, do the following:
290
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
E145983
1. Release the two latches, located on both
sides of the fuse box.
2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse box
from the cradle.
3. Move the fuse box toward the center of
the engine compartment.
4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box
to access the bottom side.
291
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
E190798
292
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used.—56
Not used.—57
Fuel pump feed.
30A
*
58
Electronic fan 3.
40A
**
59
Electronic fan 1.
40A
**
60
Not used.—61
Body control module 1.
50A
**
62
Electronic fan 2.
25A
*
63
Not used.—64
Front heated seat.
20A
*
65
Not used.—66
Body control module 2.
50A
**
67
293
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Heated rear window.
40A
*
68
Anti-lock brake system valves.
30A
*
69
Passenger seat.
30A
*
70
Active front steering.
50A
**
71
Transmission oil pump (start/stop).
20A
*
72
Rear heated seats.
20A
*
73
Driver seat module.
30A
*
74
Wiper motor 1.
25A
*
75
Power liftgate module.
30A
*
76
Climate control seat module.
30A
*
77
Trailer lighting module.
40A
*
78
Blower motor.
40A
**
79
294
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Wiper motor 2.
25A
*
80
110 volt inverter.
40A
*
81
Not used.–82
TRCM (iShifter).
20A
*
83
Starter solenoid.
30A
*
84
Vista roof.
30A
*
85
Not used.–86
Anti-lock brake system pump.
60A
**
87
*
M-type fuse.
**
J-type fuse.
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located under the
instrument panel to the left of the steering
column.
Note: It may be easier to access the fuse
panel if you remove the finish trim piece.
295
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
E145984
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Demand lighting (glove box, vanity, dome).
10A
1
1
Battery saver relay coil.
296
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Second row easy fold relay coil.
Memory seats.
7.5A
1
2
Lumbar.
Power mirrors.
Driver seat module logic power.
Driver door unlock.
20A
1
3
Not used (spare).
5A
1
4
Subwoofer amplifier.
20A
1
5
USB charger.
10A
2
6
Not used (spare).
10A
2
7
Not used (spare).
10A
2
8
Rear seat entertainment system module.
10A
2
9
360 camera badge.
Keypad.
5A
2
10
Power liftgate module logic power.
Hands free liftgate module.
297
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
MyLincoln module.
Not used (spare).
5A
2
11
Climate control module.
7.5A
2
12
Cluster.
7.5A
2
13
Steering column control module.
Smart datalink connector (gateway) module.
Not used (spare).
10A
2
14
Datalink power.
10A
2
15
Not used (spare).
15A
1
16
Not used (spare).
5A
2
17
Ignition switch.
5A
2
18
Push button start switch.
Key inhibit solenoid.
Not used (spare).
7.5A
2
19
Active front steering logic power.
7.5A
2
20
298
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Humidity and in-car temperature sensor.
5A
2
21
Occupant classification sensor.
5A
2
22
Delayed accessory (power inverter logic, moonroof logic,
driver window switch power).
10A
1
23
Heads up display.
Gear shift module.
Front camera.
360 camera module.
Central lock unlock.
20A
1
24
Driver door (window, mirror).
30A
1
25
Driver door module.
Driver door lock indicator.
Driver lock switch illumination.
Front passenger door (window, mirror).
30A
1
26
Front passenger door module.
Front passenger lock indicator.
Front passenger switch illumination (window, lock).
Moonroof.
30A
1
27
299
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Amplifier.
20A
1
28
Rear driver side door smart window.
30A
1
29
Rear passenger side door smart window.
30A
1
30
Not used (spare).
15A
1
31
Global positioning system module.
10A
1
32
Centerstack display.
Voice control (SYNC).
Radio transceiver module.
Multimedia gateway module.
Radio.
20A
1
33
Run-start bus (fuse 19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36, 37, circuit breaker
38).
30A
1
34
Restraints control module.
5A
1
35
Auto-dimming rear view mirror.
15A
1
36
Heated seat.
Auto high beam/lane departure mirror module.
Rear heated seat module logic power.
300
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Suspension module.
Heated steering wheel module (without active front steering).
20A
1
37
Rear power windows.
30A
3
38
Rear window switch illumination.
1
Micro fuse.
2
Dual micro fuse.
3
Circuit breaker.
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
You must replace a failed fuse with one
that has the specified amperage rating.
If you use a fuse with a higher amperage
rating, you may cause severe wire damage
and may start a fire.
E142430
A fuse may fail if electrical components in
the vehicle are not properly working. A
broken wire inside the fuse indicates a failed
fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
301
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide
scheduled maintenance information which
makes tracking routine service easy. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 499).
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E142457
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
302
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your left-hand
side.
E202009
4
4. Open the hood. The hood struts
automatically supports the hood.
Closing the Hood
1. Lower the hood until it engages on to the
secondary latch.
2. Firmly push down on the front of the
hood to close it fully.
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
303
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
A
I EFGH
B
C
D
E188730
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 309).A
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 315).B
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 316).C
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 284).D
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 324).E
304
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
Automatic transmission fluid dipstick. See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 313).F
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 307).G
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 308).H
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 315).I
305
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 307).C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 315).D.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 316).E.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 284).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 324).G.
Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 313).H.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 315).I.
Engine Shield
E173374
Some vehicles may be equipped with an
aero-shield under the engine. This shield
needs to be removed for service, including
oil and filter changes. The shield has four
quick-release fasteners to secure it in place.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.7L
ECOBOOST™
E188072
A
B
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
307
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.7L
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the dipstick
and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil
immediately.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the
engine is running.
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC),
comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile
manufacturers.
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).
308
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use
a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
4. Wipe off any spilled oil.
5. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the
steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Oil Life
Action and descriptionMessage
Press and hold the OK button
until the instrument cluster
displays the following
message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator
resets the instrument cluster
displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, spilling coolant on
hot engine parts can burn you.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure. Steam
and hot liquid can come out forcefully when
you loosen the cap slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
309
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine coolant
at the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 499).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant
in this chapter.
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration
should be tested with a refractometer such
as Robinair® Coolant and Battery
Refractometer 75240. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. Your warranty may not
cover these damages.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
engine coolant may change color from
orange to pink or light red. As long as the
engine coolant is clear and uncontaminated,
any color change does not indicate the
engine coolant has degraded, nor does it
require the engine coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the engine
coolant to be replaced.
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling
system. The use of an improper coolant may
harm engine and cooling system
components and may void the warranty. Use
prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location. In
this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system with
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System
Flush.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
310
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
engine coolant.
When adding coolant:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
the Ford specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 370).
3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant level
to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend
the use of recycled engine coolant since a
Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of
in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% provides
improved freeze point protection. Engine
coolant concentrations above 60%
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% provides
improved overheat protection. Engine
coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this
feature allows the vehicle to be driven
temporarily before incremental component
damage is incurred. The fail-safe distance
depends on outside temperatures, vehicle
load and terrain.
311
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge moves to the red
(hot) area and:
A high engine temperature
message appears in the
information display.
The service engine soon indicator
appears in the information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
If this occurs, your vehicle still operates.
However:
• The engine power becomes limited.
• The air conditioning system becomes
disabled.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature and the engine completely
shuts down, causing steering and braking
effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the
engine can be re-started. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer as soon as possible
to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have
limited power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may completely
shut down without warning, potentially losing
engine power, power steering assist, and
power brake assist, which may increase the
possibility of a crash resulting in serious
injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle has limited engine power when
in the fail-safe mode. Drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle does not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine
operates poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch off the engine.
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period
for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and add if low.
5. Re-start the engine and drive your vehicle
to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
See an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
312
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
WARNING
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
The transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly you should check the fluid level. If you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Checking the Transmission Fluid Level
*
Only check the transmission fluid level when
the engine is at normal operating temprature
179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C). Normal operating
temprature is reached after driving
approximately 20 mi (30 km).
E190273
A
B
MinimumA
MaximumB
Note: Check the fluid level with the engine
running and the transmission in park (P).
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid
cap in a counterclockwise direction. See
Under Hood Overview (page 304).
3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the
cap and dipstick and remove it again to
check the fluid level.
4. Make sure that the fluid level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks. If the fluid
level is at the MIN mark, add fluid
immediately. See Adding Transmission
Fluid.
5. Replace the automatic transmission fluid
cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until
you feel a strong resistance.
Low Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the minimum range
(below point A) add the correct specification
fluid to be within the hash mark area. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 370).
Note: If the fluid level is below the minimum
range do not drive your vehicle. An underfill
conition can damage the transmission.
Correct Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the hash mark area
(between points A and B) do not add any
fluid.
313
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
High Fluid Level
If the fluid level is above the maximum range
(above point A) fluid may need to be
removed. High fluid levels may be caused
by a overheating condition. If you have
operated your vehicle at high speeds, towing
a trailer or in city traffic during hot weather,
allow your vehicle to cool for a minimum of
30 minutes before rechecking the level.
Note: An overfill conition can damage the
transmission.
Adding Transmission Fluid
*
1. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid
cap in a counterclockwise direction.
*
2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
3. Add fluid that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 376). Pour the fluid
directly into the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick hole.
4. Replace the cap and dipstick and remove
it again to check the fluid level.
5. Make sure that the fluid level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
6. Replace the automatic transmission fluid
cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until
you feel a strong resistance.
*
Vehicles With 2.7L EcoBoost
WARNING
Do not run the engine with the air filter
disconnected.
E190367
x2
1. Remove the two air filter assembly
securing bolts.
2. Lift the air filter assembly to disengage
the locating pins.
3. Rotate the air filter assembly slightly in a
counterclockwise direction.
314
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
4. Check the fluid level. See Checking the
Transmission Fluid Level.
5. Install in reverse order. Tighten the two
air filter assembly securing bolts until you
feel a strong resistance.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid
could result in the loss of vehicle control,
serious personal injury or death.
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage or failure.
Failure to adhere to this warning could result
in the loss of vehicle control, serious
personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with plenty of
water and contact your physician.
WARNINGS
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need to add
fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating
range could compromise the performance
of the system. Have your vehicle checked
immediately.
E170684
Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
370).
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the
risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 370).
315
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or
lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield
your face and protect your eyes. Always
provide proper ventilation.
WARNINGS
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the vent
caps, resulting in personal injury and damage
to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with
a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield
your eyes when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft®
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during its
life of service.
Note: If your battery has a cover or shield,
make sure it is reinstalled after the battery
has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: See an authorized dealer for low
voltage battery access, testing, or
replacement.
When a low voltage battery replacement is
necessary, see an authorized dealer to
replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle
To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), do not allow a
technician to connect any electrical device
ground connection directly to the low voltage
battery negative post. A connection at the
low voltage battery negative post can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If a person adds electrical or electronic
accessories or components to the vehicle,
the accessories or components may
adversely affect the low voltage battery
performance and durability and may also
affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
316
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make
certain the battery cables are always tightly
fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
When a battery replacement is required, the
battery should only be replaced with a Ford
recommended replacement battery that
matches the electrical requirements of the
vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are maintained
by power from the low voltage battery. Some
engine computer settings, like the idle trim
and fuel trim strategy, optimize the
driveability and performance of the engine.
Some other computer settings, like the clock
and radio station presets, are also maintained
in memory by power from the low voltage
battery. When a technician disconnects and
connects the low voltage battery, these
settings are erased.
Note: Until you switch the ignition to the on
position, you will receive a message in your
information display stating that your vehicle
is not in park.
Complete the following procedure in order
to restore the settings:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set
the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into P.
3. Turn off all accessories.
4. Step on the brake pedal and start the
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the engine
is warming up, complete the following:
Reset the clock. See Audio System
(page 388). Reset the power windows
bounce-back feature. See Windows and
Mirrors (page 100). Reset the radio station
presets. See Audio System (page 388).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, step on
the accelerator to start the engine.
7. While the engine is running, step on the
brake pedal and shift the transmission to
N.
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal.
9. Drive your vehicle at least 10 miles (16
kilometers) to completely relearn the idle
and fuel trim strategy.
Note: Certain features may not operate if
the Battery Monitor System is not reset with
a scan tool following a jump start or battery
replacement. Normal electrical accessory
operation should resume after your vehicle
is left undisturbed for 8 hours.
317
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim
strategy.
Note: Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner. Follow
your local authorized standards for disposal.
Call your local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling automotive
batteries.
Note: It is recommended that the negative
battery cable terminal be disconnected from
the battery if you plan to store your vehicle
for an extended period of time.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. See Vehicle Care (page 325).
If that does not resolve the issue, install
new wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper
Blades (page 318).
Changing the Windshield Wiper Blades
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
E129990
1
1
2
1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the
wiper blade locking buttons together.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
318
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
Note: Make sure the windshield is clean
before using new wiper blades. See Vehicle
Care (page 325).
Changing the Rear Window Wiper
Blade
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
1. Lift the wiper arm.
E183236
2. Remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
Note: Make sure the rear window is clean
before using a new wiper blade. See
Vehicle Care (page 325).
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly
aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle
has been involved in a crash, have the aim
of the headlamp beam checked by an
authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters).A
Center height of lamp to ground.B
319
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
25 feet (7.6 meters).C
Horizontal reference line.D
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb
center from the ground and mark an 8
foot (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe a
flat zone of high intensity light located at
the top of the right hand portion of the
beam pattern. If the top edge of the high
intensity light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, the headlamp will need
to be adjusted.
E194757
5
320
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp. The horizontal edge of the
brighter light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.
Bulbs become hot when in use. Let
them cool down before you remove
them.
Use the correct specification bulb.
See Bulb Specification Chart (page 322).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
Headlamp
E201500
A B
Headlamp low and high beam -
vehicles with high-intensity
discharge headlamps.
A
Front direction indicator.B
Note: Vehicles with LED headlamps do not
contain servicable bulbs. See an
authorized dealer if they fail.
Front Direction Indicator
1. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
High-Intensity Discharge Headlamps
These lamps operate at a high voltage. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See an
authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
• Front parking lamps.
• Front side marker lamps.
• Front signature lamps.
• Daytime running lamps.
• Side direction indicators.
• Rear side marker lamps.
• Brake and rear lamps.
• Central high mounted brake lamp.
• Rear direction indicators.
• Reversing lamps.
• License plate lamp.
321
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart
below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with
an authorized D.O.T. marking for North
America to make sure they have the proper
lamp performance, light brightness, light
pattern, and safe visibility. The correct bulbs
will not damage the lamp assembly or void
the lamp assembly warranty and will provide
quality bulb illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDFront parking lamp.
LEDLEDFront side marker lamp.
21T20Front direction indicator.
LEDLEDDaytime running lamps.
LEDLEDFront signature lamp.
HIDD3SHigh-intensity discharge headlamps.
LEDLEDSide direction indicator.
LEDLEDRear side marker lamp.
LEDLEDBrake and rear lamp.
LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.
LEDLEDRear direction indicator.
322
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDReversing lamps.
LEDLEDLicense plate lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDInterior lamp.
LEDLEDLuggage compartment lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
323
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 370).
For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
no foreign material enter the air induction
system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
particles.
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
499).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
E144365
1. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
have a good seal.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful
not to crimp the filter element edges
between the air filter housing and cover.
This could cause filter damage and allow
unfiltered air to enter the engine if not
properly seated.
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clamps to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
324
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
• Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
• Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
(ZC-15)
• Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
• Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
• Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada
only) (CXC-66-A)
• Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-101)
• Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
• Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield
Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A,
B, D or F)]
• Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash
Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-B2)
• Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
• Motorcraft Premium Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-56)
• Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.
only) (ZC-14)
• Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23)
• Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when is hot to
the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’ s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
325
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Vehicle Care
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended cleaners
can result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure
sprayer on the surface or edge of stripes and
graphics. This can damage them and cause
the edges to peel away from the vehicle
surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle
frequently. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Always wash your vehicle before applying
wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to
apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
326
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the
area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior
of the windshield, avoid getting any glass
cleaner on the instrument panel or door
panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these
surfaces immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
327
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’ s safety belts, as
these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such
products could contaminate the side airbag
system and affect performance of the side
airbag in a collision.
Note: Follow the same procedure for
cleaning leather seats when cleaning leather
interior. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
330).
Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can stain
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
For grease or tar stains:
• Spot clean the area with Motorcraft Spot
and Stain Remover (Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner in Canada).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or
the ring will set.
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior (If Equipped)
Note: Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric is
made of polyester microfiber with
micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.
Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric.
Note: Lincoln Black Label or Presidential
vehicles may have Alcantara microfiber cloth
fabric on the seats, headliner, floor mats and
door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning Alcantara microfiber
cloth, refer to the following chart:
328
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Vehicle Care
Cleaning ProcedureType of Stain
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.
Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Avoid warm
water because it makes these substances coagulate.
Blood, egg, excrement or urine.
Use lukewarm water. If the color remains, treat with lemon juice and
then rinse.
Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola and tea.
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry with cream or chocolate, ice
cream or mustard.
Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee with sugar.
Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.Dye transfer and all other stains.
329
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or strong
detergents when cleaning the steering
wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
330).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
330
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Vehicle Care
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather
and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’ s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or
high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply
using manufacturer's instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits
of dirt and brake dust accumulation.
331
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Vehicle Care
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of
water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft
Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make sure
your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
332
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Vehicle Care
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling system
leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
333
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury
or death from a rollover or other crash you
must avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for the
conditions, keep tires properly inflated, never
overload or improperly load your vehicle,
and make sure every passenger is properly
restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants
must wear seat belts, and children and
infants must use appropriate restraints to
minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently
than passenger cars in the various driving
conditions that are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and
trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to reduce
the risk of an accident or serious injury.
All-wheel drive system (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of all-wheel-drive vehicles.
Although an all-wheel-drive vehicle may
accelerate better than a two-wheel drive
vehicle in low traction situations, it will not
stop any faster than two-wheel drive
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with all-wheel drive has
the ability to use all four wheels to power
itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional
two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
For all-wheel-drive vehicles, a spare tire of
a different size other than the tire provided
should never be used. A dissimilar spare tire
size (other than the spare tire provided) or
major dissimilar tire sized between the front
and rear axles could cause the
all-wheel-drive system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive.
334
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
How your vehicle differs from other
vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few noticeable
ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components. All
other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
E168583
335
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks
often will have a higher center of gravity and
a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT (If Equipped)
Note: The temporary mobility kit contains
enough sealant compound in the canister
for one tire repair only. See an authorized
Ford dealer for replacement sealant
canisters.
The kit is located under the load floor in the
trunk. The kit consists of an air compressor
to re-inflate the tire and a canister of sealing
compound that will effectively seal most
punctures caused by nails or similar objects.
This kit provides a temporary tire repair,
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
120 mi (200 km) at a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h) to reach a tire service
location.
E175977
Air compressor (inside).A
Selector switch.B
On and off button.C
Air pressure gauge.D
Sealant bottle and canister.E
Dual purpose hose: air and repair.F
Tire valve connector.G
Accessory power plug.H
Casing/housing.I
Bike/raft/sports ball adapters.J
General Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
Note: Do not use the kit if you have severely
damaged a tire. Only seal punctures located
within the tire tread with the kit.
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger
than ¼ inch (6 millimeters) or damage to the
tire's sidewall. The tire may not completely
seal.
336
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire
performance. For this reason:
Note: Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Note: Do not drive further than 120 mi
(200 km). Drive only to the closest authorized
Ford dealer or tire repair shop to have your
tire inspected.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers.
• Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure
in the affected tire; if the tire is losing
pressure, have the vehicle towed.
• Read the information in the Tips for Use
of the Kit section to make sure safe
operation of the kit and your vehicle.
Tips for Use of the Kit
To ensure safe operation of the kit:
• Read all instructions and cautions fully.
• Before operating the kit, make sure your
vehicle is safely off the road and away
from moving traffic. Switch on the hazard
lights.
• Always set the parking brake to ensure
the vehicle does not move unexpectedly.
• Do not remove any foreign objects, such
as nails or screws, from the tire.
• When using the kit, leave the engine
running (only if the vehicle is outdoors or
in a well-ventilated area) so the
compressor does not drain the vehicle's
battery.
• Do not allow the compressor to operate
continuously for more than 15 minutes.
This will help prevent the compressor
from overheating.
• Never leave the kit unattended during
operation.
• Sealant compound contains latex. Those
with latex sensitivities should use
appropriate precautions to avoid an
allergic reaction.
• Keep the kit away from children.
• Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -22°F (-30°C) and
158°F (70°C).
• Only use the sealing compound before
the use-by date. The use-by date is on a
label on the sealant canister, which you
can see through the rectangular viewing
window on the bottom of the compressor.
Check the use-by date regularly and
replace the canister after four years of
non-use.
• Do not store the kit unsecured inside the
passenger compartment of the vehicle
as it may cause injury during a sudden
stop or crash. Always store the kit in its
original location.
• After sealant use, an authorized Ford
dealer must replace the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve stem
on the wheel.
• Operating the kit could cause an
electrical disturbance in radio, CD and
DVD player operation.
E175978
* When inflation only is required for
a tire or other objects, the selector
must be in the Air position.
337
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
What to do When a Tire Is Punctured
You can repair a tire puncture within the tire's
tread area in two stages with the kit.
• In the first stage, inflate the tire with a
sealing compound and air. After you
inflate the tire, you will need to drive the
vehicle a short distance (about 4 miles [6
kilometers]) to distribute the sealant in
the tire.
• In the second stage, check the tire
pressure and adjust, if necessary, to the
vehicle's specified tire inflation pressure.
First Stage: Inflating the Tire with
Sealing Compound and Air
WARNINGS
Do not stand directly over the kit while
inflating the tire. If you notice any
unusual bulges or deformations in the tire's
sidewall during inflation, stop and call
roadside assistance.
If the tire does not inflate to the
recommended tire pressure within 15
minutes, stop and call roadside assistance.
WARNINGS
Do not run the engine during kit
operation unless the vehicle is
outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.
Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level
and secure area, away from moving traffic.
Switch the hazard lights on. Apply the
parking brake and switch the engine off.
Inspect the flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. Use
appropriate precautions to avoid any allergic
reactions.
Do not remove any foreign object that has
pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in
the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside
assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the back of the compressor
housing.
3. Fasten the hose to the tire valve by
turning the connector clockwise. Tighten
the connection securely.
E200523
4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt
power point in the vehicle.
5. Remove the warning sticker found on the
casing/housing and place it on the top of
the instrument panel or the center of the
dash.
6. Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running so the compressor does not
drain the vehicle’s battery.
338
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
E175981
7. Turn dial (A) clockwise to the sealant
position. Switch the kit on by pressing
the on/off button (B).
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on
the tire label located on the driver's door
or the door jamb area. The initial air
pressure gauge reading may indicate a
value higher than the label pressure
while you pump the sealing compound
into the tire. This is normal and should
be no reason for concern. The pressure
gauge reading will indicate the tire
inflation pressure after about 30 seconds
of operation. You should check the final
tire pressure with the compressor turned
OFF in order to get an accurate pressure
reading.
E175982
339
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
9. When the tire reaches the recommended
tire pressure, switch off the kit, unplug
the power cable, and disconnect the
hose from the tire valve. Re-install the
valve cap on the tire valve and return the
kit to the stowage area.
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the
vehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) to
distribute the sealant evenly inside the
tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
11. After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and
check the tire pressure. See Second
Stage: Checking Tire Pressure.
Note: If you experience any unusual
vibration, ride disturbance or noise while
driving, reduce your speed until you can
safely pull off to the side of the road to call
for roadside assistance. Note: Do not
proceed to the second stage of this
operation.
Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure
WARNINGS
If you are proceeding from the First
Stage: Re-inflating the Tire with Sealing
Compound and Air section and have injected
sealant in the tire and the pressure is below
20 psi (1.4 bar), continue to the next step.
The power plug may get hot after use
and should be handled carefully while
unplugging.
Check the air pressure of your tires as
follows:
E175983
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Firmly screw the air compressor hose
onto the valve stem by turning clockwise.
3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the
air position.
4. If required, switch on the compressor and
adjust the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure shown on the tire label
located on the driver's door or door jamb
area. You should check the tire pressure
with the compressor turned OFF in order
to get an accurate pressure reading.
5. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve cap
on the tire and return the kit to the
stowage area.
340
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
What to Do After the Tire has Been
Sealed
After using the kit to seal your tire, you will
need to replace the sealant canister. You
can obtain sealant canisters and spare parts
at an authorized Ford dealer. You can
dispose of empty sealant canisters at home.
However, you should dispose of canisters
still containing liquid sealant through your
local authorized Ford dealer or tire dealer,
or in accordance with local waste disposal
regulation.
Note: After you use the sealing compound,
the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph
(80 km/h) and the maximum driving distance
is 120 mi (200 km). You should inspect the
sealed tire immediately.
You can check the tire pressure any time
within the 120 mi (200 km) by performing the
steps listed previously in the Second Stage:
Checking Tire Pressure procedure.
Removal of the sealant canister from the
kit
E175984
1. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the compressor housing.
E175985
2. Unwrap the power cord.
E175986
3. Remove the back cover.
E175987
341
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
4. Rotate the sealant canister up 90
degrees and pull away from
casing/housing to remove.
Installation of the sealant canister to the
kit
1. With the canister held perpendicular to
the housing, insert the canister nozzle
into the connector and push until seated.
2. Rotate the canister 90 degrees down into
the housing/casing.
E175988
3. Snap the back cover back into place.
E175989
4. Wrap the dual purpose hose (black tube)
around the channel on the bottom of the
housing/casing.
E175990
5. Wrap the power cord around the housing
and stow the accessory power plug into
its storage area.
Note: If you experience any difficulties with
the removal or installation of the sealant
canister, consult an authorized Ford dealer
for assistance.
Make sure you check the sealant
compound’s use-by date regularly. The
use-by date is on a label located on the
sealant canister, which you can see through
the rectangular viewing window on the
bottom of the kit. You should replace the
sealant canister after four years of non-use.
TIRE CARE
Important Information About Low-
Profile Tires
If your vehicle is equipped with
265/40R21 tires, they are low-profile
tires. These tires and wheels are
designed to give your vehicle a sport
appearance. With low-profile tires, you
may notice an increase in road noise
and faster tire wear, depending on road
342
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
conditions and driving styles. Due to
their design, low-profile tires and wheels
are more prone to road damage from
potholes, rough or unpaved roads, car
wash rails and curb contact than
standard tires and wheels.
Note: Your vehicle's warranty does not
cover these types of damages. Extra
caution should be taken when operating
on rough roads to avoid impacts that
could cause wheel and tire damage.
Important Information About Sport
Tires and Wheels
Vehicles equipped with the optional
265/40R21 tires are designed to
enhance performance. To continue
providing this performance, extra care
must be taken when operating and
maintaining your vehicle.
These low-profile high-performance tires
are designed to optimize the driving
dynamics you expect in a sport vehicle
in both dry and wet conditions. These
tires are not optimized for off-road or
winter (snow or cold weather)
performance; and their ride, noise, and
wear characteristics are different than
non-performance tires. With low-profile
tires, you may notice an increase in road
noise and faster wear, depending on
road conditions and driving habits. Also,
because of their lower profile, the tires
are more susceptible to road damage
from potholes, rough or unpaved roads,
car wash rails, and curb contact than
standard tires and wheels.
Note: Your vehicle’s warranty does not
cover these types of damages. Extra
caution should be taken when operating
on rough roads to avoid impacts that
could cause wheel and tire damage.
The optional 265/40R21 tires were
designed for track use and may exhibit
significantly reduced tread life and
increased tire noise compared to the
standard equipment tires under normal
driving conditions. Increasing the front
camber settings beyond the factory
settings may further accelerate tread
wear and induce tire noise.
Note: Do not use tire chains on your
vehicle’s optional 265/40R21 tires and
wheels. The use of any type of tire chain
on these tires may damage your vehicle.
See Using Snow Chains (page 358).
Notice to Crossover Vehicle Owners
E200792
Crossover vehicles handle differently
than passenger cars in the various
driving conditions that are encountered
on streets, highways and off-road.
Crossover vehicles are not designed for
cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
343
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Crossover vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. To reduce this risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other
crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers.
• Drive at safe speeds for the
conditions.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Never overload or improperly load
your vehicle.
• Make sure every passenger is
properly restrained.
WARNING
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts.
Children and infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the
risk of injury or ejection.
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The Tire
Quality Grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as
the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1 ½ times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
344
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’ s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’ s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the original
equipment tire sizes, recommended
inflation pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire size
and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
345
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
*Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: for P-metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) or 36 psi (2.5 bar) depending
on tire size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load-carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier
maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load-carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle being
driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
*Recommended inflation pressure: The
cold inflation pressure found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position) or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
* B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
346
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to
186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
347
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Speed ratingLetter rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
Speed ratingLetter rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured,
the next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st
week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification
codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers
if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
348
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. See the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one and
one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.
The grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
*Temperature: The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturer's
maximum permissible pressure, or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure, which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
349
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires.
These differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual, defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single, defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires.
These differences are described below.
350
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport-utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio, which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire
inflation pressure by tire size and other
important information located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to half
of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the others,
use a tire gauge to check pressure of all
tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable
tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use
of a digital or dial-type tire pressure
gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear. Under-inflation or
over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns.
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failures and may result
in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting
in heat buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in unnecessary
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up
to half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
351
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire.
This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure, which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes
occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop
can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi
(7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your
tire pressures frequently and adjust
them to the proper pressure which can
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning
they are not hot from driving even a
mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure
when the tire is hot, (for example, driven
more than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers], never
bleed or reduce air pressure. The tires
are hot from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire
at or below recommended cold inflation
pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to
get air for your tire(s), check and record
the tire pressure first and add the
appropriate air pressure when you get
to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go up
as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge
onto the valve and measure the
pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
352
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air
by pressing on the metal stem in the
center of the valve. Then recheck the
pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. For T type mini-spare tires, see the
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly section. Store and maintain
at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and
dissimilar spare tires, see the Dissimilar
Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information section. Store and maintain
at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the Tire
Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure
there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could poke a hole in the
tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure
there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve stems
for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit
air leakage and repair or replace the tire
and replace the valve stem. Inspect the
tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired
or replaced. For your safety, tires that
are damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 millimeters), tires
must be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or wear
bars, which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread is
worn down to one sixteenth of an inch
(2 millimeters).
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the tire
is worn out and must be replaced.
353
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the tread
or sidewall). If damage is observed or
suspected have the tire inspected by a
tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time depending
on many factors such as weather,
storage conditions, and conditions of
use (such as load, speed, inflation
pressure) the tires experience
throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after
six years regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process and may
require tires to be replaced more
frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when
you replace the road tires or after six
years due to aging even if it has not
been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
354
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended
tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk
WARNINGS
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case or power transfer unit
failure. If you have questions regarding
tire replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
To reduce the risk of serious injury,
when mounting replacement tires
and wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following precautions must
be taken to protect the person mounting
the tire:
WARNINGS
1. Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20
psi (1.38 bar) greater than the maximum
pressure, an authorized dealer or other
tire service professional should do the
mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a
remote air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
355
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle.
The two front tires or two rear tires
should generally be replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels (originally installed on your
vehicle) are not designed to be used in
aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire
pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, the system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud or sand, do not rapidly spin
the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A tire can
explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35
mph (56 km/h). The tires may fail
and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This may further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If you cannot detect a cause,
have the vehicle towed to the nearest
repair facility or tire dealer to have the
vehicle inspected.
356
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re driving, the
wheels may be out of alignment. Have
an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension
may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is different
in brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels. If you have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
it is intended for temporary use only and
should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval (as indicated in the scheduled
maintenance information) will help your
tires wear more evenly, providing better
tire performance and longer tire life.
Sometime irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
Front-wheel drive and All-wheel drive
vehicles (front tires on the left side of
the diagram).
E142547
357
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
USING SUMMER TIRES
Summer tires provide superior performance
on wet and dry roads. Summer tires do not
have the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire
traction rating on the tire side wall. Since
summer tires do not have the same traction
performance as All-season or Snow tires, we
do not recommend using summer tires when
temperatures drop to approximately 45°F
(7°C) or below (depending on tire wear and
environmental conditions) or in snow and ice
conditions. Like any tire, summer tire
performance is affected by tire wear and
environmental conditions. If you must drive
in those conditions, we recommend using
Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or
Snow tires.
Always store your summer tires indoors at
temperatures above 20ºF (-7ºC). The rubber
compounds used in these tires lose flexibility
and may develop surface cracks in the tread
area at temperatures below 20ºF (-7ºC). If
the tires have been subjected to 20ºF (-7ºC)
or less, warm them in a heated space to at
least 40ºF (5ºC) for at least 24 hours before
installing them on a vehicle, or moving the
vehicle with the tires installed, or checking
tire inflation. Do not place tires near heaters
or heating devices used to warm the room
where the tires are stored. Do not apply heat
or blow heated air directly on the tires.
Always inspect the tires after storage periods
and before use.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size, load
index, and speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire
or wheel not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury, and death. Additionally, the
use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case, or power transfer unit failure.
It is also strongly advised to follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets
the door-latch post, next to the driver’s
seating position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven
treadwear patterns and adversely affect the
way your vehicle handles.
358
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
The tires on your vehicle may have
all-weather treads to provide traction in rain
and snow. However, in some climates you
may need to use snow chains.
Your vehicle may not be compatible with
snow chain or cable usage with the
factory-fitted wheels and tires. Only certain
chains or snow cables have been approved
by Ford as safe for use on your vehicle with
the following wheel and tire combination(s):
18x8.0 wheels with 235/60R18 tires. You
should only install chains or cables sized at
10 mm or less in dimension as measured on
the sidewall of your tire. Not all S-class snow
chains meet these restrictions. Chains of this
size restriction will include a tensioning
device. The chains should be mounted in
pairs on the front tires only. If you need to
use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specification)
be used, as chains may chip aluminum
wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using traction
devices:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body to
tire dimension restrictions.
• When driving with snow chains or cables,
do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer; whichever is less.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
or cables rub or bang against the vehicle,
stop and retighten them. If this does not
work, remove the chains or cables and
prevent vehicle damage.
• Remove the chains or cables when they
are no longer needed. Do not use the
chains or cables on dry roads.
• If a temporary spare tire is mounted on
your vehicle, do not use snow chains on
the axle with the temporary spare tire.
If you have any questions regarding snow
tires or snow chains, please contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system is
not a substitute for manually checking
tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using
a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this
chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.)
359
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’ s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
360
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly
low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires
are under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
361
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning light
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
362
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after
you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may
increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from
a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as being
significantly lower than the recommended
inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure. If the low
tire pressure warning light is on, visually
check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If
one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the road
tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully
drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate
all the tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used.
The tire pressure monitoring system sensor
and valve stem on the wheel must be
replaced by an authorized dealer after use
of the sealant.
WARNINGS
If the tire pressure monitor sensor
becomes damaged, it will no longer
function. See Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (page 359).
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply
the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the tire
pressure monitoring system sensors. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 359).
Replace the spare tire with a road tire as
soon as possible. During repairing or
replacing of the flat tire, have an authorized
dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor for damage.
363
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided by Ford.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be
one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins
with the letter T for tire size and may have
Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
wheel: This spare tire has a label on the
wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare
tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed
above at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable).
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
364
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off the
ground, the transmission alone will not
prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping
off the jack, even if the transmission is in park
(P).
WARNINGS
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park (P), set
the parking brake and block (in both
directions) the wheel that is diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the vehicle)
to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack. If your vehicle
slips off the jack, you or someone else could
be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating the
jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one provided
as original equipment with your vehicle,
make sure the jack capacity is adequate for
the vehicle weight, including any vehicle
cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
E175447
3. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the flat tire. For
example, if the left front tire is flat, block
the right rear wheel.
4. Lift the carpeted load floor panel and
secure in the up position with the hanger
clip.
365
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
5. Remove the steel winged washer nut
securing the spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Remove the spare tire from the spare tire
compartment.
7. Remove plastic wing nut and jack and
lug wrench assembly. Detach lug wrench
from jack by turning the jack hex nut
drive screw counterclockwise.
8. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off the
ground.
E145908
9. The vehicle jacking points are shown
above, and are depicted on the yellow
warning label on the jack.
E201100
10. Position the jack so that the vehicle
downward flange rests in the jack
saddle flange as shown above. Raise
the vehicle by using the lug wrench to
turn the jack nut clockwise. Once the
flat tire is raised above the ground,
remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
11. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
12. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
3
4
5
E75442
13. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 368).
14. Fold up the wrench/jack handle and
re-attach to the jack. Re-position
jack/wrench assembly into the original
vehicle position and secure with the
plastic wing nut. Make sure the jack is
fastened securely before you drive.
15. Unblock the wheel.
366
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
Stowing the flat tire
You cannot store the full-sized road wheel
in the temporary spare tire well.
1. Find the flat tire retainer strap tucked
inside the jack channel. Lower the
carpeted load floor.
2. Stow the flat tire in the cargo area on the
load floor with the wheel facing up.
Secure the flat tire with the retainer strap
by following the next steps.
E142906
3. Locate the rear left side and right side
cargo tie-down rings. Push the loop end
of the retainer strap through one cargo
tie-down ring. Thread the non-loop end
through the loop.
4. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
5. Locate the cargo tie-down in the opposite
rear corner of the cargo area. Thread the
retainer strap though the tie-down and
pull tight.
E143746
6. Secure the flat tire by tying a 2-half hitch
knot.
367
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the
hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at
the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss
of control.
lb.ft (Nm)*Bolt size
162 lb.ft (220 Nm)M14 x 1.5
*Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a
flat tire, wheel removal).
368
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
369
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
2.7L EcoBoost engineEngine
164Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
10.0:1Compression ratio
0.028-0.031 in. (0.7 - 0.8 mm)Spark plug gap
Drivebelt Routing
2.7L EcoBoost engine
E191903
370
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
3.7L engineEngine
227Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
10.5:1Compression ratio
0.049 - 0.053 in. (1.25 - 1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
Drivebelt Routing
3.7L engine
E191904
371
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
2.7L EcoBoostComponent
FA-1912Air filter element
FL-2062Oil filter
BXT-94RH7-730Battery
SP-542Spark plugs
FP-80Cabin air filter
WW-2350 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-1750 (passenger side)
WW-1106 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
meet or exceed specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 499).
372
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.7L
3.7L V6 TiVCTComponent
FA-1912Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-94RH7-730Battery
SP-520Spark plugs
FP-80Cabin air filter
WW-2350 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-1750 (passenger side)
WW-1106 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet
or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 499).
373
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
374
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission code
along with the transmission description.
CodeDescription
CSix-speed automatic transmission 6F55
JSix-speed automatic transmission 6F50
375
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.7L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
10.6 qt (10 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15L)Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive)
11.8 fl oz (0.35 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
11.0 qt (10.4 L)*Automatic transmission fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.4 gal (69.5 L)Fuel tank (Front Wheel Drive)
18.5 gal (70 L)Fuel tank (All Wheel Drive)
376
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
21 oz (0.595 kg)A/C refrigerant
5.2 fl oz (155 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
* Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
377
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
378
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
379
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
380
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your
vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use
motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
381
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
11.7 qt (11.1 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15L)Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive)
11.8 fl oz (0.35 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
11.0 qt (10.4 L)
*
Automatic transmission fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.4 gal (69.5 L)Fuel tank (Front wheel drive)
18.5 gal (70 L)Fuel tank (All wheel drive)
24.0 oz (0.68 kg)A/C refrigerant
5.2 fl oz (155 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
382
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
383
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential (All Wheel Drive) fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive):
Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
384
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
385
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your
vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use
motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
386
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
387
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.
388
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Audio System
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 individual tracks and folder
structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
disc playback: MP3 track mode (system
default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The player
numbers each MP3 track on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 files
may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio
present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder
structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all MP3
tracks on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) and all folders containing MP3
files, from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to
F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is
important to understand how the system
reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only files with
the .mp3 extension are played; other files
are ignored by the system. This enables you
to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of
tasks on your work computer, home
computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all .mp3 files play, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system
only plays the .mp3 files in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: The MyLincoln Touch system controls
most of the audio features. See
Entertainment (page 422).
389
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Audio System
A B
CDE
F
E171512
CD slot: Insert a CD.A
Eject: Press the control to eject a CD.B
390
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Audio System
TUNE: Turn the control to search manually through the radio frequency band. The system stops at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, the system selects the previous or next channel. If you select a specific category (Jazz, Rock, News, etc.),
turn the TUNE control to find the previous or next channel in the selected category.
C
Seek/Fast Forward/Reverse: Press the control to go to the previous or next track or available radio station. Press and hold to either
reverse or fast forward through the current track or to quickly reverse or advance through the radio bands in individual increments.
D
Volume: Turn the control to adjust the volume level on your system.E
Power: Press the control to switch the audio system on and off.F
MEDIA HUB
The media hub is located in the center
console or in front of the gear shift.
E194341
USB PortA
SD card slotB
391
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
392
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
A
B
G
C
DF
E
E161891
Menu ItemItem
PhoneA
NavigationB
ClimateC
SettingsD
Menu ItemItem
HomeE
InformationF
EntertainmentG
This system uses a four-corner strategy to
provide quick access to several vehicle
features and settings. The touchscreen
provides easy interaction with your cell
phone, entertainment, information and
system settings. The corners display active
modes within the menus, for example; your
cell phone's status.
Note: Some features are not available while
your vehicle is moving.
393
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Note: You can access the entertainment
features for 30 minutes after you switch the
ignition off, and no doors are opened.
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
Menu Item
Phone
Quick Dial
Phonebook
History
Messaging
Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
Menu Item
My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address
Intersection
City Center
Map
Edit Route
Cancel Route
CLIMATE
Press the corresponding icons to control the
following options:
• Driver Settings
• Recirculated Air
• Auto
• Dual
• Passenger Settings
• A/C
• Defrost
SETTINGS
E142607
Press to select any of the following:
Menu Item
Clock
Display
Sound
Vehicle
Settings
Help
394
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
HOME
E142613
Press to access the home screen.
Note: Depending on your vehicle’s option
package and software, the screens may vary
in appearance from the descriptions in this
section. The features may also be limited
depending on the market. Check with an
authorized dealer for availability.
INFORMATION
E142608
Press to select any of the following:
Menu Item
Services
Travel Link
Alerts
Calendar
Apps
Where Am I?
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
Menu Item
AM
FM
SIRIUS
CD
USB
BT Stereo
SD Card
Using the Audio Controls
Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Action and DescriptionControls
Switch the media features on or off.Power
Adjust the volume of playing media.Volume
Use as you normally would in media modes.Tune
395
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionControls
Eject a CD from the entertainment system.Eject
Press this button to switch the display screen off. Press again, or touch the screen to switch the
display screen on.
Display
Touch the control repeatedly to switch between media modes.Source
Adjust the settings for:Sound
Bass
Treble
Midrange
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
EQ Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
396
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle, it may also have the following controls:
Action and DescriptionControl
Adjust the volume of playing media.VOL
Press to start a voice session. Press again to interrupt a voice prompt and begin speaking. Press
and hold to end an active voice session.
Voice
Use as you normally would in media and phone modes.Seek and Call Accept
Use as you normally would in media and phone modes.Seek and Call Reject
Using the Touchscreen
• Make sure your hands are clean and dry.
• Press firmly on the center of a control
graphic or menu item.
• Keep metal objects or other conductive
material away from the surface of the
touchscreen.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a dry, clean, soft cloth. If dirt or
fingerprints are still visible, apply a small
amount of alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour
or spray alcohol onto the display. Do not use
detergent or any type of solvent to clean the
display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available:
• Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
• United States: 1-800-521-4140
• Canada: 1-800-387-9333
Note: Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
397
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
• Do not operate media devices if the
power cables are broken or damaged.
• Make sure the power cables do not
interfere with the safe operation of your
vehicle's controls or affect your safe
driving abilities.
• Some SYNC functions are
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds
below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system are restricted
from use unless your vehicle is stationary.
• Screens crowded with information, for
example:
• Point of Interest reviews and ratings
• SIRIUS Travel Link sports scores
• Movie times
• Ski conditions.
• Any action that requires keyboard use,
for example: entering a navigation
destination or editing information.
• All lists are limited, for example: phone
contacts.
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Speed-restricted Features
Pairing a cell phoneCell phone
Adding or editing phonebook contacts
Phone contacts and recent phone call entries
398
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Speed-restricted Features
Enabling Valet ModeSystem Functionality
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active
Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi and Wireless
Editing the list of wireless networks
Adding or editing wallpaperPhotos and Graphics
Composing text messagesText Messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation
Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book or Avoid Area entries
399
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Privacy Information
When you connect a cell phone to SYNC,
the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cell phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cell phone book, text
messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system. In
addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent system
activity. The log profile and other system data
may be used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and
development log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them, and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when your
cell phone or media player is connected. If
you no longer plan to use the system or your
vehicle, we recommend you carry out a
Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada do not access
the system data for any purpose other than
as described without consent, a court order,
or where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third parties
acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist®,
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic, Directions
and Information.
Using Voice Commands
This system helps you control many features
using voice commands. This allows you to
keep your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of
your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the lower left status bar
indicating the status of the voice command
session (such as Listening, Success, Failed,
Paused or Try Again).
How to Use Voice Commands
E142599
The following are some of the
voice commands that you can say
at any time during a voice
command session.
400
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Voice command
Main Menu
What Can I Say
Previous Page
Go Back
Help
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken voice commands.
• After pressing the voice command icon,
wait until after the tone sounds and a
message appears before saying a voice
command. Any voice command spoken
prior to this does not register with the
system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the system
while it is speaking by pressing the voice
command icon.
Accessing a List of Available Voice
Commands
To access a list of available voice commands
you can do either of the following.
Using the touchscreen, press:
Menu Item
Settings
Help
Voice Command List
Using the steering wheel control, press the
voice button and when prompted say one
of the following:
Voice Commands
List of Commands
Radio List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Voice Instructions List of Commands
Voice Command Settings
These allow you to customize the level of
system interaction, help and feedback. The
system defaults to standard interaction that
uses candidate lists and confirmation
prompts as these provide the highest level
of guidance and feedback.
401
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
In this mode the system provides detailed interaction and
guidance.
NoviceInteraction Mode
This mode has less audible interaction and more tone
prompts.
Advanced
The system uses these short questions to confirm your voice command. If turned off, the system
simply makes a best guess as to what you requested. The system may still occasionally ask you to
confirm a voice command.
Confirmation Prompts
Candidate lists are lists of possible results from your voice commands. The system creates these
lists when it has the same confidence level of several options based on your voice command
Phone Candidate Lists
Media Candidate Lists
Using the touchscreen, press the settings
icon, then press:
Menu Item
Voice Settings
Voice Control
Select from the following:
Interaction Mode
Menu Item
Confirmation Prompts
Media Candidate Lists
Phone Candidate Lists
Voice Control Volume
Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options
The voice command system has a dual mode
feature which allows you to switch between
using voice commands and making
on-screen selections. This is available only
when the system displays a list of candidates
generated during a voice command session.
For example, this can be used when entering
a street address or trying to call a contact
from a cell phone paired to the system.
402
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
SETTINGS
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
Menu ItemItem
ClockA
DisplayB
SoundC
Menu ItemItem
VehicleD
SettingsE
HelpF
Clock
E142607
Under this menu, you can set the
clock, access and adjust the
display, sound and vehicle settings
as well as access settings for specific modes
or the help feature.
403
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Press the + or - to adjust the time.Clock
From this screen, you can also make other adjustments such as 12-hour or 24-hour mode, activate
GPS time synchronization and have the system automatically update new time zones.
You can also switch the outside air temperature display off and on. It appears at the top center
of the touchscreen, next to the time and date.
Note: You cannot manually set the date. Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been disconnected, your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to update the clock. Once your vehicle acquires the
signal, it may take a few minutes for the update to display the correct time.
Display
E142607
You can adjust the display using
the touchscreen or the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls.
404
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Display
Then select from the following:
Allows you to switch the display off. It also allows you to set the screen to a certain brightness or have the system
automatically change based on the outside light level.
Mode
If you also select:
These features will allow you to adjust the dimming of your screen.Auto
Night
Allows you to display the default photo or upload your own.Edit Wallpaper
When set to On, lets you use the automatic dimming feature.Auto Dim
When set to Off you are able to adjust the brightness of the screen.
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
Allows you to adjust screen dimming as the outside lighting conditions change from day to night.Auto Dim Manual Offset
E142599
405
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To make adjustments using the voice
button, press the button and when
prompted, say:
Voice command
Display Settings
Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen
Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly from
your camera. You must access the photos
either from your USB mass storage device
or from an SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large
dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not
be compatible and appear as a blank (black)
image on the display.
The system allows you to upload and view
up to 32 photos.
E142607
To access, press:
To upload your photos, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Display
Follow the system prompts to upload your photographs.Edit Wallpaper
Only the photograph(s), which meets the
following conditions display:
• Compatible file formats are as follows:
JPG, GIF, PNG, BMP.
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384.
Sound
E142607
406
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To make adjustments using the
touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Settings
Sound
Then select from the following:
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
Occupancy Mode
Menu Item
Speed Compensated Volume
DSP
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of these
sound settings.
Vehicle
E142607
To make adjustments using the
touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Settings
Vehicle
Then select from the following:
Menu Item
Ambient Lighting
Vehicle Health Report
Camera Settings
Enable Valet Mode
Ambient Lighting
When you switch this feature on, ambient
lighting illuminates the dashboard, footwells,
doors, cupholders, and console with a choice
of colors.
407
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Ambient Lighting
• You can then touch the desired color.
• Use the scroll bar to increase or decrease the intensity.
• To switch the feature on or off, press the power button.
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped, US Only)
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Vehicle Health Report
Turn on and off and set the mileage interval at which you would like to receive the reports. Press
the ? for more information on these selections.
Automatic Reminders
408
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Mileage Interval (Miles)
To run the vehicle health report immediately.Run Vehicle Health Report Now
You can find more information on Vehicle Health Report in this chapter.
Camera Settings
This menu allows you to access settings for
your rear view camera. See Parking Aids
(page 205).
E142607
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Enhanced Park Aids
Rear Camera Delay
You can find more information on the rear view camera system in another chapter.
409
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Enable Valet Mode
E142607
Valet mode allows you to lock the
system. No information is
accessible until the system is
unlocked with the correct PIN.
Note: If the system locks, and you need to
reset the PIN, please contact the Customer
Relationship Center.
United States: 1-800-521-4140
Canada: 1-800-387-9333
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Vehicle
Then enter a four digit PIN twice, as prompted.Enable Valet Mode
After you press Continue the system locks until you enter the PIN again.Continue
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
System
E142607
410
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
System
Then select from the following:
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French.Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System Prompt Volume
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen.Touch Screen Button Beep
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC format.Keyboard Layout
Install any downloaded applications or view the current software licenses.Install Applications
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal data.Master Reset
Voice Control
E142607
411
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Settings
Voice Control
Then select from the following:
Novice interaction mode provides more detailed interaction and guidance. Advanced mode has
less audible interaction and more tone prompts.
Interaction Mode
Have the system ask you short questions if it has not clearly heard or understood your request.Confirmation Prompts
Note: Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system may occasionally ask you to confirm
settings.
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands. The system simply makes a best
guess at your request with these turned off.
Media Candidate Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands. The system simply makes a best
guess at your request with these turned off.
Phone Candidate Lists
This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level.Voice Control Volume
Media Player
E142607
412
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Media Player
Then select from the following:
When this feature is on, the system automatically switches to the media source upon initial
connection. This allows you to listen to music during the indexing process. When this feature is
off, the system does not automatically switch to the inserted media source.
Autoplay
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device. You can also set a device as your favorite
so that the system automatically attempts to connect to that device at every ignition cycle.
Bluetooth Devices
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote® Database Info
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies metadata information for your music files.
This overrides information from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Gracenote® Management
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplied cover art for your music files. This overrides
any art from your device. This feature defaults to Media Player.
Cover Art Priority
Navigation
E142607
413
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Navigation
Then select from the following:
Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or bottom to top.
Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.
Select shortest route, fastest route or ecological route as your preferred route. This route will be
displayed first.
Route Preferences
Always use preferred route. If set to yes, the system will only calculate a single route. This speeds
up your destination entry process.
Select a low, medium or high cost for the calculated ecological route. This may incur a time penalty.
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid toll roads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.
414
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences
Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province information.
Have the system automatically avoid traffic concerns or allow you to accept or decline an alternative
route.
Traffic Preferences
Have the system automatically alert you to traffic concerns that occur on your route.
Have the system display accident icons.
Have the system display traffic jam icons.
Have the system display closed roads.
Have the system display areas where road work occurs.
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
415
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announcements.
Enter specific areas that would like to avoid on planned navigation routes.Avoid Areas
Phone
E142607
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Phone
Then select from the following:
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save it as a favorite.Bluetooth Devices
Turn Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside your vehicle. With this feature
turned on, text message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your vehicle.
Do Not Disturb
416
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information (page 455).911 Assist
Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone, beep, text to speech or silent.Phone Ringer
Select the type of notification for text messages - alert tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be
silent.
Text Message Notification
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet data connection. Select to make your
connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection. You can also
choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect, never connect when roaming,
or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
Access features, such as automatic phonebook download, re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning
Wireless and Internet
E142607
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature
that creates a wireless network
within your vehicle, thereby
allowing other devices (such as personal
computers or phones) in your vehicle to
speak to each other, share files or play
games. Using this Wi-Fi feature, everyone in
your vehicle can also access the internet if
you have a USB mobile broadband
connection inside your vehicle, your phone
supports personal area networking or if you
park outside a wireless hotspot.
417
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Wireless & Internet
Then select from the following:
Wi-Fi Network (Client) ModeWi-Fi Settings
Turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. Make sure you switch it on for connectivity
purposes.
Choose a Wireless Network
Allows you to use a previously stored wireless network. You can categorize by alphabetical listing,
priority and signal strength. You can also choose to search for a network, connect to a network,
disconnect from a network, receive more information, prioritize a network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode
Makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when turned on. This forms the local
area network within your vehicle for things, such as game playing, file transfer and internet
browsing. Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings
Allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as the internet gateway.
418
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Gateway (Access Point) Devices List
Allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB mobile broadband connection to access
the internet. (You must switch on your mobile broadband device on your personal computer before
connecting it to the system.) This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area for your
USB mobile broadband connection. (USB mobile broadband settings may not display if the device
is already on.) You can select the following:
USB Mobile Broadband
Country
Carrier
Phone Number
User Name
Password
Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to
connect, disconnect, set as favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a registered trademark
of the Bluetooth SIG.
Bluetooth Settings
Choose your connection methods and change them as needed. You can select to change order
and have the system either always attempt to connect using a USB, mobile broadband, or using
Wi-Fi.
Prioritize Connection Methods
419
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
E142626
The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification
mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help
E142607
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press the settings icon.Settings
Help
Then select from the following:
Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Information
Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
Navigation system version
Map database version
Sirius satellite radio ESN
Gracenote® Database Information and Library version
420
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your system.View Software Licenses
Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving.Driving Restrictions
Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information (page 455).911 Assist
Allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE
contacts for quick access if there is an emer-
gency.
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial
The ICE contacts you select appear at the end of
the Emergency Assistance call process.
Select to access your phonebook and then select
the desired contacts. The numbers then appear
as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2
buttons.
Edit
View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice Command List
E142599
You can also access Help using
the voice commands. The system
provides allowable voice
commands for the current mode.
421
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Voice command
Help
You can say help at any time to get
assistance with commands, menus or other
information.
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
E161892
422
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Menu Item and DescriptionMessage
AMA
FMB
SIRIUSC
CDD
USBE
Touch this button to scroll down for more options, for example SD Card and USBF
These buttons change with the media mode you are in.G
Radio memory presets.H
Note: Some features may not be available in your area. Contact an authorized dealer for more information.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
AM/FM Radio
E142611
The following controls are available
for AM/FM radio
423
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionItem
Touch either tab to listen to the radio. To change between AM and FM presets, just touch the AM or FM
tab.
AM
FM
Save a station by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas. There is a brief mute while the
radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished.
Presets
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The light on the button illuminates when the feature is on. HD
Radio allows you to receive radio broadcasts digitally, where available, providing free, crystal-clear sound.
See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
HD Radio
Touch this button to go to the next strong AM or FM radio station. The light on the button illuminates
when the feature is on.
Scan
Touch this button to manually enter the desired station number. Touch Enter when you are done.Direct Tune
Options
You can make adjustments to the following options:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to adjust settings for:Sound Settings
Bass
Midrange
424
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
This allows you to select a category of music you would like to search for. You can then choose to either
seek or scan for the stations playing that category.
Set PTY for Seek / Scan
This allows you to view the information broadcast by FM stations.RDS Text Display
AST (Autostore) allows you to have the system automatically store the six strongest stations in your current
location.
AST
This feature is available when HD Radio is on, and allows you to tag a song to download later. When you
select On, TAG appears on-screen when HD Radio is active. You can touch TAG to save the information
of the song that is playing. When you plug in your portable music player, the information transfers, if
supported by your device. When you are connected to iTunes, the tags appear to remind you of the songs
you would like to download. See HD Radio information later in this chapter.
TAG Button
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
425
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available
in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution
of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a
special receiver that allows it to receive
digital broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better
sound quality than analog broadcasts with
free, crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide
to available stations and programming,
please visit www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo either blinks when acquiring a
digital station, and then stays solid when
digital audio is playing, or is grey when
acquiring a digital station, and then changes
to orange when digital audio is playing.
When this logo is available, you may also see
Title and Artist fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode
(only) if the current station is broadcasting
multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers signify available digital channels
where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2
through HD7) are only available digitally.
TAG allows you to save a song to download
later when you are on an acquired HD Radio
station and the feature is on.
426
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To turn the feature on and use it, select AM or FM and the select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Options
TAG Button
When you hear a song you, select:On
The system automatically saves the song's information and transfers it to your portable music player (if
supported) when you connect it to the system. The system automatically transfers the tag to your player
(if already connected) and a pop-up confirms the transfer.
TAG
When you access iTunes with your portable music player, the tags appear to you as a reminder. The
system allows you to tag up to approximately 100 songs. For a list of devices that support tagging, see
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca
427
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Allows you to hear a brief sampling of all available stations. This feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may see the HD logo appear if the
station has a digital broadcast.
Scan
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the
sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital audio plays, because
the system has to reacquire the digital signal.
Presets
Note: As with any saved radio station, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area.
428
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station may
mute due to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast
is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the
station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station
in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital
version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes
from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to a
station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
429
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a broadcast issue.This is poor time alignment by the radio broad-
caster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in audio
volume.
No action required. The reception issue may clear
up as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between analog and digital
audio.
Sound fading or blending in and out.
No action required. This is normal behavior. Wait
until the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not available until the HD
Radio broadcast is decoded. Once decoded, the
audio is available.
There is an audio mute delay when
selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune
No action required. The station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast
channel when recalling a preset or
from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form at http://
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.Text information does not match
currently playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form at http://
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.There is no text information shown
for currently selected frequency.
No action required. This is normal behavior.This selection disables HD2-HD7 channel search.HD2-HD7 stations not found when
you press Scan
430
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor Company
and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed, added
or deleted at any time at the station owner's
discretion.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Action and DescriptionVoice command
Radio
Then you can say a command similar to the following:
Say a frequency or preset.FM
Off
Help
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
E142611
431
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To turn the feature on press the lower left corner of the touchscreen, and then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
SIRIUS
You can then select any of the following:
Save a channel by pressing and holding one of the memory preset areas. There is a brief mute while the
radio saves the channel. Sound returns when finished.
Presets
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite.Alerts
If you are listening to music, you can save the song or artist, so the system can alert you when they are
playing on a satellite radio channel. If you are listening to a sporting event, you can save your favorite
teams so the system can alert you when they are playing on a satellite radio channel. You can also edit
alerts or turn alerts on or off.
When an alert appears on the screen, you can choose to tune to the channel, cancel the alert or turn off
alerts.
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you
have remained tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
Replay
While in replay mode:
Press and release the seek buttons to hear the previous or next song.
Press and hold the seek buttons to reverse or fast forward in the current track.
Press play or pause to play or pause the audio.
Press the button again to return to live audio.
432
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of channels.Scan
Touch this button to view a list of all available stations. Scroll to see more categories. Touch the station
you want to listen to.
Browse
Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for Alert feature variation.
Browsing Controls
Action and DescriptionMessage
Touch this button if you want to skip this channel.Skip
Touch this button if you do not want anyone to listen to this channel.Lock
Touch this button to see song titles being played on other stations.Title
Touch this button to see artists being played on other stations.Artist
Touch this button to see a list of all the channel names.Channel
Options
Touch this button to view and adjust various
media settings.
433
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Menu Item, Actions and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to adjust settings for:Sound Settings
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
Occupancy Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
This allows you to select a category of music you would like to search for. You can then choose to either
seek or scan for the stations playing that category.
Set Category for Seek/Scan
This allows you to lock and unlock channels, change or reset your PIN or unlock all channels. To use this
feature, you need your initial PIN, which is 1234.
Parental Lockout
This feature allows you turn alerts on and off.Artist / Title / Team Alerts
SIRIUS requires this number when communicating with you about your account.Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
Touch this button to manually enter the desired satellite channel number. Touch Enter when you are doneDirect Tune
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
434
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E142593
SIRIUS satellite radio is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts a
variety of music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming. Your
factory-installed SIRIUS satellite radio system
includes hardware and a limited subscription
term that begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a list of SIRIUS
satellite radio channels, and other features,
please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United
States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call
SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. The ESN
is on the System Information Screen (SR
ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX).
To access your ESN, touch the bottom left
corner of the touchscreen, then select:
Menu Item
SIRIUS
Options
435
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage
and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage
and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker
one and the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.Satellite radio signal interference
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This message should disap-
pear shortly.
Radio requires more than two seconds to produce
audio for the selected channel.
Acquiring…
If this message does not clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault.
See an authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or choose another preset.The channel is no longer available.Invalid Channel
436
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to another channel.
Your subscription does not include this channel.Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS
tower to your vehicle antenna.
No Signal
No action required. The process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel programming in progress.Updating…
Contact SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no longer available.Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found
Check Channel Guide
No action required.SIRIUS has updated the channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated
437
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to SIRIUS
satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls. You will hear a prompt, you can
then say any of the commands in the
following table.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite
radio, press the voice button and, after the
tones press the voice button and when
prompted say:
Voice command
Sirius
You can then say any of the following or
a similar command:
SAT 1
Sports Games
Voice command
Tune
Help
You can also say the name of any Sirius
station, such as “The Highway” or “Deep
Tracks”, to listen to that station.
CD
E142611
To access, press the lower left corner on
the touchscreen, then select:
Menu Item
CD
438
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Insert your CD then select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to repeat the currently playing track, all tracks on the disc or switch the feature off if
already on.
Repeat
Touch this button to play the tracks or entire albums in random order, or switch the feature off if already
on.
Shuffle
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of all available tracks.Scan
Touch this button to see disc information.More Info
Touch this button to look through all available CD tracks.Browse
To adjust the Sound Settings, select:
Menu Item
Options
Sound Settings
Then any of the following:
Bass
Midrange
Menu Item
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
Occupancy Mode
EQ Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the following commands.
439
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
If you are not listening to a CD, press the
voice button and, after the tone, say:
Voice command
CD Player
When listening to a CD you can say many
commands. Following are a few examples
of what you can say.
Voice command
Play
Pause
Next Track
Previous Track
Help
SD Card Slot and USB Port
The SD card slot and USB port are located
in the Media Hub. See Media Hub (page
391).
SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, press the card in and
the system ejects it. Do not attempt to pull
the card to remove it as this could cause
damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses this
card slot. See Navigation (page 473).
E196637
The SD card slot is located either in the
center console or behind a small access door
in the instrument panel. To access and play
music from your device, press the lower left
corner of the touchscreen.
E142620
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
USB Port
E196638
The USB ports are located either in the
center console or behind a small access door
in the instrument panel. To access and play
music from your device, press the lower left
corner of the touchscreen.
440
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.
Playing Music from Your Device
Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 30,000 songs.
E142611
Insert your device and select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Once the system recognizes your USB or SD card you can then select from the following options:USB
SD Card
This feature replays the currently playing song or album.Repeat
Touch this button to play music on the selected album or folder in random order.Shuffle
This feature allows you to choose music similar to what is currently playing.Similar Music
Touch this button to see disc information, for example current track, artist name, album and genre.More Info
Touch this button to view and adjust various media settings.Options
441
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Sound
You can adjust the settings for:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
BassSound Settings
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
EQ Mode
Speed Compensated Volume
Allows you to select more settings, which is under Media Player. See Settings (page 403).Media Player Settings
Displays software and firmware information about the currently connected media device.Device Information
Indexes your device when you connect it for the first time and each time the content changes (for example
adding or removing tracks) to make sure you have the latest voice commands available for all media on
the device.
Update Media Index
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings.
442
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Browse
This feature allows you to view the contents
of the device. It also allows you to search by
categories, for example genre, artist or
album.
If you want to view song information, for
example Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, and
Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
To hear how the system pronounces the current band and song. This can be helpful when using voice
commands to make sure the system correctly plays your request.
What’s Playing?
USB and SD Card Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button and when prompted say:
Voice command
SD Card
USB
Then commands such as the following:
Browse
Next Track
443
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Voice command
Pause
Say the name of what you would like to listen to such as a band, song, album or playlist.Play
*
Play Artist ___
*
Play Song ___
Similar Music
Help
*
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of anything, such as a group, artist or song. For example you could say "Play
artist The Beatles" or "Play song Penny Lane".
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital
media player, including iPod, Zune™, plays
from device players, and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA,
WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed media
from your playing device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the media
files, provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC may classify the empty metadata
tags as unknown.
Bluetooth Audio
E142611
The system allows you to stream
audio over your vehicle's speakers
from your connected,
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone.
444
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To access, press the lower left corner on
the touchscreen, then select:
Menu Item
BT Stereo
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
E142599
The voice system allows you to
control your media with a simple
voice command. For example to
change songs, press the voice button and
follow the system prompts.
PHONE
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
445
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
MessageItem
PhoneA
Quick DialB
PhonebookC
HistoryD
MessagingE
SettingsF
Hands-free calling is one of the main features
of SYNC®. Once you pair your cell phone,
you can access many options using the
touchscreen or voice commands. While the
system supports a variety of features, many
are dependent on your cell phone’s
functionality.
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are cell phone-dependent
features. To check your cell phone’s
compatibility, see your cell phone’s user
manual and visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
The first thing you must do to use the phone
features of SYNC is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone with SYNC.
This allows you to use your cell phone in a
hands-free manner.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature. It
is unavailable when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
446
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Touch the upper left corner of the touchscreen:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Add phone
Follow the on-screen instructions.Find SYNC
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone is in the correct mode. See your
cell phone’s manual if necessary.
Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure Simple Pairing. To
pair, enter the PIN displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches
the PIN displayed on your cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For more information on your cell phone's
capability, see your cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature. It
is unavailable when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and
that your cell phone is in the correct mode.
See your device's manual if necessary.
447
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To pair a subsequent cell phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Phone
Settings
Bluetooth Devices
Add Device
Follow the on-screen instructions.Find SYNC
Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On and that your cell phone is in the correct mode. See your
cell phone’s manual if necessary.
Select SYNC and a six-digit PIN appears on your device.
If you are prompted to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure Simple Pairing. To
pair, enter the PIN displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the next step.
When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm that the PIN provided by SYNC matches
the PIN displayed on your cell phone.
The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options. For more information on your cell phone's
capability, see your cell phone's manual and visit the website.
Making Calls
E142599
448
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Press the voice button and say a command
similar to the following:
Voice command
Call
Dial
You can say the name of a person from your
phone book to call or a say a number to dial.
For example "Call Jenny" or "Dial 867-5309".
E142632
To end the call or exit phone
mode, press and hold the phone
button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Call information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Message
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
E142632
To reject the call, select:
Message
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs
it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on the touchscreen
to select from the following options:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to access the on-screen numerical pad to enter a number and place a call. During
an active call, you can also choose any of these options:
Phone
Mute Call
Hold Call
449
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Privacy
Join Calls
End
Select to call stored contacts.Quick Dial
Touch this button to access and call any contacts in your previously downloaded phonebook. The
system places the entries in alphabetical categories summarized at the top of the screen
Phonebook
To turn on contact picture settings, if your device supports this feature, select:
Phone
Settings
Manage Phonebook
Display Photos from Phonebook
Certain smartphones may support transferring street addresses when listed with phonebook contact
information. If your cell phone supports this feature, you can select and use these addresses as
destinations and save them as favorites.
Note: This is a cell phone-dependent feature. If your cell phone does not support downloading call
history using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps track of calls made with the SYNC system.
Call History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to SYNC, you can access any previously
dialed, received or missed calls. You can also choose to save these to:
450
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Quick DialFavorites
Send text messages using the touchscreen. See Text Messaging later in this section.Messaging
Touch this button to access various phone settings, for example turning Bluetooth on and off,
managing your phonebook and more. See Phone Settings later in this section
Settings
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are
speed-dependent and not available when
your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your cell phone.
You can send and receive text messages
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms, for
example LOL.
Touch the top left corner of the display,
then select:
Message
Phone
Messaging
Then any of the following:
Listen (speaker icon)
Dial
Message
Send Text
View
Delete
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature. It
is unavailable when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
451
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To compose and send a text message, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Phone
Messaging
Enter a cell phone number or choose from your phonebook.Send Text
Allows you to customize the pre-defined message or create a message on your own.Edit Text
Sends the message as it is.Send
You can then preview the message, verify
the recipient as well as update the message
list.
Text Message Options
Message
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
Message
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there early.
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Message
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
Note: If you select View and your vehicle is
traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system
offers to read the message to you instead
of allowing you to view it while driving.
452
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if
supported by your cell phone. You can
select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Action and DescriptionMessage
To view the text message.View
For SYNC to read the
message to you.
Listen
To call the contact.Dial
To exit the screen.Ignore
Phone Settings
To enter the phone settings menu select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Phone
Settings
Then any of the following:
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as save it as a favorite.Bluetooth Devices
To turn Bluetooth off or on.Bluetooth
If you want all calls to go directly to your voicemail and not ring in the vehicle. When this feature
is on, text message notifications do not ring inside the cabin either.
Do Not Disturb
Turn the 911 Assist feature on and off. See Information (page 455).911 Assist
453
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMessage
Select the ring tone you want to hear when you receive a call. Choose from possible system ring
tones, your currently paired cell phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech or a silent notification.
Phone Ringer
Select a text message notification, if supported by your cell phone. Choose from possible system
alert tones, text-to-speech or silent.
Text Message Notification
If your cell phone is compatible, use this screen to adjust your internet data connection. Select to
make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection. You
can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
To access features such as automatic phonebook download, re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your cell phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
To have the system alert you when your cell phone is in roaming mode.Roaming Warning
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
454
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following or a similar
command:
Voice command
Call Voicemail
Voice command
Listen to Message
Reply to Message
Pair Phone
Help
INFORMATION
E188418
455
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Menu ItemItem
SYNC ServicesA
Travel LinkB
AlertsC
CalendarD
AppsE
Where Am I?F
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the Information
button to access these features. If
your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation,
press the corner of the touchscreen with the
green tab.
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United
States Only)
Note: SYNC Services varies by trim level and
model year and may require a subscription.
Traffic alerts and turn-by-turn directions
available in select markets. Message and
data rates may apply. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to change or discontinue
this product service at any time without prior
notification or incurring any future obligation.
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to
register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply. Subscription
may be required. You must also have the
active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC
Services. See Phone (page 445).
Note: This feature does not function properly
if you have enabled caller ID blocking on
your cellular phone. Make sure your cellular
phone is not blocking caller ID before using
SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for
the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in
roads, traffic conditions or driving conditions.
456
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you request,
for continuous improvement, the service may
collect and record call details and voice
communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you do not want
Ford or its service providers to collect your
vehicle travel information or other
information identified in the Terms and
Conditions, do not subscribe or use the
service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to give
you personalized traffic reports, precise
turn-by-turn directions, business search,
news, sports, weather and more. For a
complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services
You can connect to SYNC Services using
voice commands or by selecting a menu item
on the touchscreen.
457
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To use voice commands, press the voice button and say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
This initiates an outgoing call to SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-
enabled cellular phone. Once you connect to the service, follow the voice prompts to request
the desired service, for example traffic or directions.
Services
Once connected to SYNC Services, you can also say the following:
Receive a list of available services from which to choose.What Can I Say
To return to the Services main menu.Services
Receive system help.Help
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
press the I (Information) button. If your
vehicle is not equipped with Navigation,
press the green tab on your touchscreen.
To use the touchscreen select:
Menu Item
Connect to Services
This command initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Once you connect to the service, follow the
voice prompts to request the desired service.
458
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
Press the voice button and say:
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
To receive directions to a location. Once you select your destination,
the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates a route
based on current traffic conditions and sends it back to your vehicle.
After the route download is complete, the phone call automatically
ends. You then receive audible and visual driving instructions as you
travel toward your destination.
Directions
To find a business or type of business. Once you select your destina-
tion, the system uploads your current vehicle location, calculates a
route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back to your
vehicle. After the route download is complete, the phone call automat-
ically ends. You then receive audible and visual driving instructions
as you travel toward your destination.
Business Search
To find the closest business or type of business to your location, within
business search.
Search near me
Provides you with further assistance within Directions and Business
Search. The system may prompt you to speak with an operator when
it has difficulty matching your voice request. The live operator can
assist you by searching for businesses by name or by category,
residential addresses by street address or by name or specific street
intersections. Operator Assist is a feature of your SYNC Services
Operator
459
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
subscription. For more information on Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Say yes when prompted and the system sends a new route
to your vehicle.
Yes [During an active route]
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
Press and hold the hang-up phone button
on the steering wheel.
From the SYNC Services main menu say:
Voice Command
Good-bye
460
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
SYNC Services Quick Tips
Tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite
information. You can save address points, such as work or home. You can also save favorite
information like sports teams, for example Detroit Lions, or a news category. You can learn more
about personalization by logging onto www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time (while connected to SYNC Services) to interrupt a voice prompt
or an audio clip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not your
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped
with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your personalized services.
Portable
SYNC Services Voice Commands
E142599
When a route has been
downloaded (non-navigation
systems), press the voice button
on the steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands:
Services
Voice command
Cancel Route
Route Status
Route summary
Update Route
Help
461
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Sirius Travel Link (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link, your
vehicle must be equipped with navigation
and your navigation SD card must be in the
SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click
on Coverage map and details for a complete
listing of all traffic areas covered by Sirius
Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the Sirius
Travel Link services or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link, it
can help you locate the best gas prices, find
movie listings, get current traffic alerts, view
the current weather map, get accurate ski
conditions and see scores to current sports
games.
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby your vehicle’ s current location
or near any of your favorite places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s location or on an active
navigation route
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available.Movie Listings
462
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five day forecast for the
chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map, which can show storms,
radar information, charts and winds.
Map
Select to choose from a listing of weather locations.Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to
10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
463
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted, say any
of the following or a similar command:
Voice command
Show Traffic
Show Weather
Help
Alerts
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Alerts, then choose from any of the
following services:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The complete messageView
The messageDelete
MessagesDelete All
This screen displays any system messages
(such as an SD card fault).
Note: The system alerts you to any
messages by turning the information icon
yellow. After you read or delete the
messages, the icon returns to white.
Calendar
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the I
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current
calendar by day, week or month.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on
before a crash, the system will not dial
for help, which could delay response time,
potentially increasing the risk of serious
injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it yourself.
Dial emergency services immediately to
avoid delayed response time, which could
increase the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist
within five seconds of the crash, the system
or phone may be damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does not
become a projectile or damaged in a crash.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury to
someone or damage the phone, which could
prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
464
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts where
fitted or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your
SYNC-equipped vehicle may be able to
contact emergency services by dialing 911
through a paired and connected
Bluetooth-enabled phone. For more
information about the 911 Assist feature visit:
Website
visit www.SYNCMyRide.com
www.SYNCMyRide.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 44). Important information regarding
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 272).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
touch the I (Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the corner
of the touchscreen with the green tab. Then
select:
Menu Item
Apps
911 Assist
On
E142607
You can also access 911 Assist by pressing
the Setting icon and then selecting:
Menu Item
Settings
Phone
911 Assist
465
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Menu Item
You can also select:
Help
911 Assist
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
prior to the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone
to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time of
the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and
be located in the United States, Canada
or in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (which would trigger
911 Assist); however, SYNC tries to contact
emergency services if 911 Assist triggers. If
a connected phone sustains damage or loses
connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and
tries to connect to, any available previously
paired phone and tries to make the call to
911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(approximately 10 seconds) to cancel the
call. If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911,
to cancel the call, press Cancel on your
screen or press and hold the phone
button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and then
the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk
with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location
immediately, because not all 911 systems are
capable of receiving this information
electronically.
466
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
911 Assist May Not Work If:
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system
has no power.
• The phones(s) previously paired or
connected to the system are thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may disclose
to emergency services that your vehicle has
been in a crash involving the deployment of
an airbag or activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically
or verbally disclosing to 911 operators your
vehicle location or other details about your
vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this
information, do not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING
Always follow scheduled maintenance
instructions, regularly inspect your
vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report
supplements, but cannot replace, normal
maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle
Health Report only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle and
will not monitor or report the status of any
other system, (such as brake lining wear).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regularly inspect your vehicle may result
in vehicle damage and serious injury.
Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is
no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly
if you have enabled caller ID blocking on
your cellular phone. Before running a report,
review the Vehicle Health Report Privacy
Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for
your vehicle, you may not be able to create
a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle
odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may
apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your account
at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your
report. You can also choose for SYNC to
remind you automatically to run reports at
specific mileage intervals. Cellular phone
airtime usage may apply when reporting.
467
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
The system allows you to check your
vehicle’s overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, for
example:
• Vehicle diagnostic information.
• Scheduled maintenance.
• Open recalls and Field Service Actions.
• Items noted during vehicle inspections
by your authorized dealer that still need
servicing.
Making a Report
E142608
If you want to run a report by using the
touchscreen, select:
Menu Item
Apps
Vehicle Health Report
E142599
You can also run a vehicle health
report by voice command.
Press the voice button and when prompted
say:
Voice command
Vehicle Health Report
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set up
your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
468
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Where Am I?
For information about your current location,
select:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
View your vehicle's
current location, if
your vehicle is
equipped with
navigation. If your
vehicle is not
equipped with
Where Am I?
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
navigation, nothing
displays.
CLIMATE
Touch the lower right corner on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line and
option package, your climate screen may
look different from this screen.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 403).
469
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
E171848
K
Power: Touch the button to switch the system on and off. Switching off the climate control system prevents outside air from entering
the vehicle.
A
Passenger settings:B
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
Touch the heated seat icon to switch the heated seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to switch the climate-controlled seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch Dual to switch separate passenger side temperature controls off and on. When you switch off Dual, the passenger side
temperature changes to match the driver side temperature.
470
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Note: The passenger side temperature and the Dual indicator automatically turn on when the passenger is adjusting their temperature
control.
Fan speed: Touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated in your vehicle.C
Note: When the system is controlling the fan speed automatically, all the fan speed indicators turn off.
Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air and recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the air
currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C)
and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
D
Note: Recirculated air may turn off automatically (or be prevented from turning on) in all airflow modes except Max A/C to reduce
risk of fogging. Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in Panel or Panel and Floor airflow modes during hot weather
in order to improve cooling efficiency.
Max A/C: Touch the button to maximize cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning
automatically turns on, and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
A/C: Touch the button to switch air conditioning compressor on or off. Use air conditioning with recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency.
F
Note: In certain conditions (such as when using Max Defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even after
you switch off the air conditioning with the A/C button.
Auto: Touch the button to switch on automatic operation. Select the desired temperature using the temperature control. The system
adjusts fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning operation, and selects outside air or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle
in order to maintain the desired temperature. You can also use the Auto button to switch off dual zone operation by touching and
holding the button for more than two seconds.
G
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 143).H
471
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Max Defrost: Touch the button to maximize defrosting. Outside air flows through the windshield vents, fan automatically adjusts to
the highest speed and the temperature dial returns to the full heat position. You can use this setting to defog or clear a thin covering
of ice from the windshield. The heated rear window also automatically turns on when you select Max Defrost.
I
Air distribution control: Touch these buttons to switch airflow from the windshield, instrument panel, or footwell vents on or off.
The system can distribute air through any combination of these vents.
J
Note: To prevent window fogging, you cannot select recirculated air when MAX Defrost is on.
Driver settings:K
Touch the + or – to increase or decrease the air temperature on the driver side of the vehicle.
Touch the heated seat icon to switch the heated seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch the climate-controlled seat icon to switch the climate-controlled seat off and on (if equipped).
Touch MyTemp to select your preset temperature setpoint. Touch and hold MyTemp to save a new preset temperature setpoint.
Touch the heated steering wheel icon to switch the heated steering wheel on and off (if equipped).
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
wood-trimmed steering wheel, it does not
heat between the 10 o'clock and 2 o'clock
positions.
Climate Control Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
or a similar command:
472
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Voice commands
Climate On
Climate Off
Adjust the temperature to between 15.0 - 30.0°C or 59 - 86°F.Set temperature
NAVIGATION
Note: The navigation SD card must be in the
SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD card,
see an authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded. To
remove the SD card, just push the card in
and release it. Do not attempt to pull the
card out to remove it; this could cause
damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of two
main features, destination mode and map
mode.
Destination Mode
To set a destination press the green corner
of your touchscreen, then the press:
Menu Item
Dest.
Choose any of the following:
My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address
Menu Item
Intersection
City Center
Map
Edit Route
Cancel Route
To set your destination, enter the necessary
information into the highlighted text fields (in
any order).
473
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
For an address destination entry, press:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
Pressing this button
makes the address
location appear on
the map.
Go
To choose a previous destination, press:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
The last 20 destina-
tions you have
selected appear.
Previous Destina-
tions
Once you have chosen your destination press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
To make this your destination. You can also choose to set this as a waypoint (have the system route
to this point on the way to your current destination) or save it as a favorite. You can then choose
your route from three different options.
Set as Dest
Uses the fastest moving roads possible.Fastest Route
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest Route
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Eco Route
474
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To begin navigation press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can cancel the route or have the system demo the route for you.Start Route
During route guidance, you can press the talking bubble icon that appears in the upper right navigation
corner (green bar) if you want the system to repeat route guidance information. When the system
repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to the next guidance instruction, since
it detects when the vehicle is moving.
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized road
and you do not press the Start Route button,
the system defaults to the Fastest Route
option and begins guidance.
Point of Interest (POI) Categories
Main Categories
Food/Drink & Dining
Travel & Transportation
Financial
Emergency
Community
Main Categories
Health & Medicine
Automotive
Shopping
Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports
Government
Domestic Services
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt Office
Public Transit
Education
475
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
To expand these listings, press the + in front
of the listing.
The system also allows you to sort
alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).
cityseekr
Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 912
cities (881 in the United States, 20 in Canada
and 11 in Mexico).
E142634
cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants, hotels
and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such as
address and phone number. If cityseekr lists
the point of interest, more information is
available, such as a brief description,
check-in and checkout times or restaurant
hours.
For a longer review, a list of services and
facilities, the average room, meal price or
the website press:
Menu Item
More Information
This screen displays the point of interest icon
such as:
E143884
Hotel
E142636
Coffeehouse
E142637
Food & Drink
E142638
Nightlife
E142639
Attraction
E142640
This icon appears when your
selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
When you are viewing more information
for hotels, cityseekr also tells you if the
hotel has certain services and facilities
using icons, such as:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
476
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-FI
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, average cost,
review, handicap access, hours of operation,
and website address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide information
such as star rating, price category, review,
check-in and checkout times, hotel service
icons and website address.
Setting Your Navigation Preferences
E142607
Select settings for the system to
take into account when planning
your route.
To access the settings options, press
Menu Item
Settings
Navigation
Then select any of the following:
Map Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Display your vehicle’s previously traveled route with white dots. You can switch this feature:Breadcrumbs
OffOn
Have the system display your turn listTurn List Format
477
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Bottom to TopTop to Bottom
When parking point of interest notification is on, the icons display on the map when you get close
to your destination. This may not be very useful in dense areas, and may clutter the map when other
points of interest display. Set the automatic parking point of interest notification. You can switch
this feature:
Parking POI Notification
OffOn
Route Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcologicalFastest RouteShortest Route
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only calculates one route based on preferred
route setting.
Always use Preferred
Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination.
478
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.
Eco Time Penalty
When activated, you can to choose to have the system avoid motorways, toll roads, ferries and car trains when
planning your route.
Avoid
Have the system use high-occupancy vehicle lanes, if available, when planning your route.Use HOV Lanes
Navigation Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Navigation Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Select the type of prompts the system uses.Guidance Prompts
Voice and TonesTones Only
Have the system automatically fill in the state and province based on the information already
entered into the system. You can switch this feature:
Auto - Fill State/Province
OffOn
479
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Traffic Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Traffic Preferences
Then select any of the following:
You can choose how you want the system to handle traffic problems along your route.Avoid Traffic Problems
Have the system reroute you to avoid traffic incidents that
develop and impact the current route. The system does not
provide a traffic alert notification
Automatic
Have the system always provide a traffic alert notification
for traffic incidents along the planned route. You have a
choice to accept or ignore the notification before making
the route deviation.
Manual
Activate traffic alert notifications on or off.Traffic alert notification
These icons will alert you to traffic and driving conditions including accidents, closures and weather
conditions.
You are also able to switch on and off
the 11 traffic map icons.
480
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Avoid Area
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Choose areas which you want the system to avoid when calculating a route for youAvoid Areas
Then select any of the following:
Once you make a selection, the system tries to avoid the area(s) if possible for all routes. Select
this button to program an entry, then choose a destination entry method. You can edit the name
or location of a destination or remove it from your selections.
Add
To remove an area from your selection, choose the listing on the screen. The screen will change,
then press delete and confirm the deletion.
Delete
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area
of the touchscreen to view map mode. Map
mode shows advanced viewing comprised
of both 2D city maps as well as 3D landmarks
(when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use and land elements
and detailed railway infrastructure for the
most essential cities around the globe. These
maps also contain features, such as town
blocks, building footprints and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects
that are typically recognizable and have a
certain tourist value. The 3D landmarks
appear in 3D map mode only. Coverage
varies and improves with updated map
releases.
481
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
E174016
Change the appearance of the map display
by repeatedly pressing the arrow button in
the upper left corner of the screen. It toggles
between three different map modes:
Heading up, North up and 3D.
E142642
Heading up (2D map) always shows
the direction of forward travel to be
upward on the screen. This view is
available for map scales up to 2.5 miles (4
kilometers). The system remembers this
setting for larger map scales, but shows the
map in North up only. If the scale returns
below this level, the system restores Heading
up.
E142643
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be upward
on the screen.
E142644
3D map mode provides an elevated
perspective of the map. This viewing
angle can be adjusted and the map
can be rotated 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and then dragging
your finger along the shaded bar with arrows
at the bottom of the map.
You can also select the following options:
DescriptionMenu Items
Switches between
full map, street list
and exit view in
route guidance.
View
Displays a pop-up
box that allows
direct access to
navigation settings.
Menu
E174017
Press the speaker button on the
map to mute route guidance. When
the light on the button illuminates,
the feature is on. The speaker button
appears on the map only when route
guidance is active.
E146188
Re-center the map by pressing this
icon whenever you scroll the map
away from your vehicle’s current
location.
482
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode,
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map
scale. The map zoom level then synchronizes
with vehicle speed. The slower your vehicle
is traveling, the farther the map zooms in;
the faster your vehicle is traveling, the farther
the map zooms out. To switch off the feature,
just press the + or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by swiping
your finger across the shaded bar with the
arrows.
The ETA box under the zoom buttons
appears when a route is active and displays
the distance and time to your destination. If
the button is pressed, a pop up appears with
the destination listed (and waypoint if
applicable) along with mileage and time to
destination. You may also select to have
either the estimated time to reach your
destination or your estimated arrival time.
Map Icons
E142646
Vehicle mark shows the current
location of your vehicle. It stays in
the center of the map display,
except when in scroll mode.
E142647
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the
map; the fixed icon is in the center
of the screen. The map position
closest to the cursor is in a window on the
top center part of the screen.
E142648
Address book entry default icon(s)
indicates the location on the map of
an address book entry. This is the
default symbol shown after the entry has
been stored to the Address Book by any
method other than the map. You can select
from any of the 22 icons available. You can
use each icon more than once.
E142649
Home indicates the location on the
map currently stored as the home
position. You can only save one
address from the Address Book as
your Home entry. You cannot change this
icon.
E142650
POI (Point Of Interest) icons indicate
locations of any point of interest
categories you choose to display on
the map. You can choose to display three
point of interest categories on the map at
one time.
E142651
Starting point indicates the starting
point of a planned route.
E142652
Waypoint indicates the location of a
waypoint on the map. The number
inside the circle is different for each
waypoint and represents the position
of the waypoint in the route list.
E142653
Destination symbol indicates the
ending point of a planned route.
E142654
Next maneuver point indicates the
location of the next turn on the
planned route.
483
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
E142655
No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals are
available for accurate map
positioning. This icon may display under
normal operation in an area with poor GPS
access.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the
map display to access the following options:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch this button to select a scrolled location on the map as your destination. You may scroll the
map by pressing your index finger on the map display. When you reach the desired location, simply
let go and then touch this button.
Set as Dest
Touch this button to set the current location as a waypoint.Set as Waypoint
Touch this button to save the current location to your favorites.Save to Favorites
Touch this button to select icons to display on the map. You can select up to three icons to display
on the map at the same time. You can switch these features:
POI Icons
OffOn
When on an active route, select any of the following options:View / Edit Route
View Route
Edit Destination/Waypoints
Edit Turn List
Detour
484
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Edit Route Preferences
Edit Traffic Preferences
Cancel Route
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to Here
by going to www.here.com/mapcreator.
HERE evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their investigation
by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available
for purchase through your dealership, by
calling 1-866-462-8837 (in Mexico, call
01-800-557-5539) or going to
www.navigation.com/sync. You need to
specify the make and model of your vehicle
to determine if there is an update available.
Navigation Voice Commands
E142599
When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls.
After the tone, say any of the following or
a similar command:
Voice command
Destination
Zoom Out
Zoom In
Where Am I
Help
The following commands can only be used
when a navigation route is active:
Voice command
Detour
Cancel Route
Show Route
Repeat Instruction
Turn List
485
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
One-shot Destination Street Address
To set a destination with voice commands,
you can say:
Action and Descrip-
tion
Voice Command
The system asks you
to say the full
address. The system
displays an example
on-screen.
Find an Address
You can then speak the address naturally,
such as "One two three four Main Street,
Anytown".
MYLINCOLN TOUCH™
TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your account
and set preferences as well as access a
customer representative via an online chat
(during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more information.
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review your phone's manual about audio
adjustments.
The audio control settings on your phone may
be affecting SYNC performance.
There is excessive background noise during
a phone call.
Try turning off the device, resetting the device,
removing the device's battery, then trying
again.
This may be a possible phone malfunction.During a call, I can hear the other person but
they cannot hear me.
Go to the website to review your phone's
compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent feature.
This may be a possible phone malfunction.
SYNC is not able to download my phonebook.
486
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device, resetting the device
or removing the device's battery, then trying
again.
Try pushing your phonebook contacts to
SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on
the website.
Try pushing your phonebook contacts to
SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature.
This may be a limitation on your phone's
capability.
The system says Phonebook Downloaded but
the phonebook in SYNC is empty or missing
contacts. If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM
card, try moving them to the device memory.
Remove any pictures or special ring tones
associated with the missing contact.
Depending upon your phone, you may have
to grant SYNC permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make sure to confirm
when prompted by your phone during the
phonebook download.
Go to the website to review your phone's
compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent feature.
This may be a possible phone malfunction.
I am having trouble connecting my phone to
SYNC.
Try turning off the device, resetting the device
or removing the device's battery, then trying
again.
487
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Phone issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try deleting your device from SYNC, deleting
SYNC from your device and trying again.
Check the security and auto accept and
prompt always settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on your phone.
Update your device's firmware.
Turn off the Auto phonebook download
setting.
You can also preform the touchscreen system
reset procedure.
Go to the website to review your phone's
compatibility.
This is a phone-dependent feature.
This may be a possible phone malfunction.
Text messaging is not working on SYNC.
Try turning off the device, resetting the device
or removing the device's battery, then trying
again.
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Try turning off the device, resetting the device,
removing the device's battery, then trying
again.
This may be a possible device malfunction.I am having trouble connecting my device.
488
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
USB and media issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
cable.
Make sure you insert the USB cable correctly
into the device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have an
auto-install program or active security settings.
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
your vehicle during very hot or cold temperat-
ures.
This is a device limitation.SYNC does not recognize my device when I
turn on the car.
Review the device compatibility chart on the
SYNC website to confirm your phone supports
the Bluetooth audio streaming function.
This is a phone-dependent feature.
The device is not connected.
Bluetooth audio does not stream.
Make sure you correctly connect the device
to SYNC, and that you have pressed play on
your device.
You can also preform the touchscreen system
reset procedure.
Make sure that all song details are populated.Your music files may not contain the correct
artist, song title, album or genre information.
SYNC does not recognize music that is on my
device. Some devices require you to change the USB
settings from mass storage to MTP class.The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copyright protection,
which does not allow it to play.
489
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
This is a free feature, but you must first register
online to use it.
You did not activate your account on the
website.
I received a text that I did not activate Vehicle
Health Report.
Make sure that your VIN is correctly listed in
your account.
You may have the wrong VIN (vehicle identi-
fication number) listed.
When you register your account, you must
choose a preferred dealer. If it already lists a
dealer, try selecting another dealer and
logging out. Log back in, change it back to
your preferred dealer, and retrieve the report.
The preferred dealer information did not load
correctly.
I am unable to retrieve the report on the
website, or I receive a system error.
Update your cellular number in your account
on the website.
This could be due to your phone's compatib-
ility.
I am unable to submit a report.
Make sure you have full signal strength and
that your Bluetooth volume level has been
turned up.
Bad signal strength.
You did not register your phone correctly on
the website.
Make sure the currently connected phone is
registered on your SYNCMyRide account.
Try deleting your phone and performing a
clean pairing.
This is a free feature, but you must first register
online to use it.
You did not activate this phone for this service.
Your phone has ID blocker active.
I heard a commercial when I tried to use
Traffic, Directions and Information.
490
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic, Directions and Information) issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Turn off ID blocker on your phone as the
system recognizes you by your phone number.
Make sure the currently connected phone is
the same one that is registered on your
SYNCMyRide account.
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Review the phone voice commands and the
media voice commands at the beginning of
their respective sections.
You may be using the wrong voice commands.
You may be speaking too soon or at the
wrong time.
SYNC does not understand what I am saying.
After pressing the voice icon, wait until after
the tone sounds and Listening appears before
saying a command. Any command spoken
before this does not register with the system.
Review the media voice commands at the
beginning of the media section.
You may be using the wrong voice commands.
You may be saying the name differently than
the way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand the name of a
song or artist.
Say the song or artist exactly as listed. If you
say "Play Artist Prince", the system does not
play music by Prince and the Revolution or
Prince and the New Power Generation.
The system may not be reading the name the
same way you are saying it.
491
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you are saying the complete title,
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If the song titles are in all CAPS, you have to
spell them. LOLA requires you to say "L-O-L-
A".
Do not use special characters in the title. The
system does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice commands at the
beginning of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong voice commands.
You may be saying the name differently than
the way you saved it.
SYNC does not understand or is calling the
wrong contact when I want to make a call.
Make sure you are saying the contacts exactly
as they are listed. For example, if you save a
contact as Joe Wilson, say "Call Joe Wilson".
The system may not be reading the name the
same way you are saying it.
Using the SYNC phone menu, open the
phonebook and scroll to the name SYNC is
having trouble understanding. SYNC will read
the name to you, giving you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is expecting.
Contacts in your phonebook may be very short
and similar, or they may contain special char-
acters.
Your phonebook contacts may be in CAPS.
The system works better if you list full names,
such as "Joe Wilson" rather than "Joe".
Do not use special characters, such as 123 or
ICE, as the system does not recognize them.
492
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
Voice command issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
If a contact is in CAPS, you have to spell it.
JAKE requires you to say "Call J-A-K-E".
Touchscreen system reset
The touchscreen system has System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to
restore functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text
messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system reset to complete. You may then resume
using the SYNC system.
493
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
MyLincoln Touch™
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit our
online store at:
Web Address
www.Accessories.Lincoln.com
You can also visit:
Web Address
www.LincolnCanada.com
Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Lincoln Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
accessory through the warranty that provides
the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
• Side window deflectors.
• Splash guards.
Interior Style
• Ambient lighting.
• Floor mats.
• Rear seat entertainment system.*
• Sport pedals.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup or coin holder.
• Cargo organization and management.
• Cross bars and roof rails.
• Roof rack and carriers.*
• SUV camping tent.*
Peace of Mind
• Bumper protector.
• Car cover.*
• Cargo area protector.
• Cargo security shade.
• Hitch-mounted parking sensors.*
• Vehicle security.
• Wheel locks.
*Lincoln Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Lincoln Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Lincoln Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the accessory
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
494
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Ask an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulations and should be installed only
by an authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did not
design them specifically for automotive
use.
• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add
any non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
495
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A
LINCOLN EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
Lincoln owners have discovered the powerful
protection of Lincoln Extended Service Plan.
It is the only extended service plan backed
by Lincoln Motor Company, and provides
peace of mind protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Lincoln ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor
– can easily exceed the price of your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan. With Lincoln ESP,
you minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four Extended Service Plans with
different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1000 covered
components, this plan is so complete that
we generally only discuss what’s not
covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Lincoln and Ford dealers in
the United States, Canada and Mexico. It is
the only extended service plan authorized
and backed by Lincoln Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
496
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage to
the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle was
properly maintained with Lincoln ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Lincoln Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and select items
that routinely wear out. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
affording your vehicle maintenance. It covers
regular checkups, routine inspections,
preventive care and replacement of select
items that require periodic attention for
normal wear:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers and struts.
• Engine cooling hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Engine belts.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable,
no interest, no fee payment program allowing
you all the security and benefits Lincoln ESP
has to offer while paying over time. You are
pre-approved with no credit checks, no
hassles! To learn more, call our Lincoln ESP
specialists at 800-367-3377.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Extended Service
Plan. Lincoln Extended Service Plan is the
only service contract backed by Lincoln
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Lincoln
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
497
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
There are several Lincoln Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is
tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Lincoln Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Lincoln Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find the
Lincoln Extended Service Plan that is right
for you.
498
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you have
your vehicle serviced at the proper times.
These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 370).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about
the training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement
Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services
that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
499
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000
kilometers).
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles (800
kilometers) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 309).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or 5000
miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10000
miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance systems.
Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts and
component systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this
testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost
to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from
the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
500
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
Make sure to change your vehicle’ s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
501
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every six months
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
502
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
you use your vehicle. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
503
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the message prompting you to change your oil
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
504
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level (if equipped with a dipstick). Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle.
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 308).
505
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items
1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
4
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
506
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3000 miles
(4800 kilometers) of a message appearing
in the information display prompting you to
changing your engine oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers). Perform
the 30000-mile (48000 kilometer)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30000 miles
(48000 kilometers) (for example, the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset at
25000 miles [40000 kilometers]).
Perform the engine air filter replacement.
507
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
508
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
or six months
509
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
*
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 308).
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel.Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle Maintenance
Change the axle fluid anytime an axle is
submerged in water.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North
Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality,
the normal oil change interval is 3000 miles
(5000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is 1800
miles (3000 kilometers).
510
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and
dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and cabin
air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
511
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
512
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
513
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
514
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
515
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
516
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
517
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
518
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
519
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
520
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
521
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)
• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY") from an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation ("MS") . Those
installed software products of MS origin,
as well as associated media, printed
materials, and "online" or electronic
documentation ("MS SOFTWARE") are
protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The MS
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("FORD
SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The FORD SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of third
party origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE
and THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
hereinafter collectively and individually
will be referred to as "SOFTWARE".
522
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO
NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA
grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICE and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process.
Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor
its suppliers shall be liable for any
damages arising out of errors in the
speech recognition process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to reverse
engineer, decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICE, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
523
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail
to comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
• Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use the
WMDRM technology included in your
DEVICE to protect their intellectual
property, included copyrighted content.
Portions of the SOFTWARE on your
DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the
WMDRM software fails to protect the
content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does not
affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected
content, you agree that Microsoft may
include a revocation list with the licenses.
Content owners may require you to
upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an
upgrade, you will not be able to access
content that requires the upgrade.
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree that
MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and systems suppliers, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent may collect
and use technical information gathered
in any manner as part of product support
services related to the SOFTWARE or
related services. MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
third party software and services
suppliers, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent may use this
information solely to improve their
products or to provide customized
services or technologies to you. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or
their designated agent may disclose this
information to others, but not in a form
that personally identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service suppliers, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components that
you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components").
524
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide or
make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make available
Supplemental Components, and no other
EULA terms are provided, then the terms of
this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity
providing the Supplemental Component(s)
shall be the licensor of the Supplemental
Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you or
made available to you through the use of the
SOFTWARE.
525
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites through
the use of the SOFTWARE. The third
party sites are not under the control of
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent. Neither
MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their
affiliates nor their designated agent are
responsible for (i) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions particularly
as they pertain to safety and assumes
any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the
SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE
as a replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or
their affiliates or suppliers. The SOFTWARE
is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the
SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual property
rights in and to the content which may be
accessed through use of the SOFTWARE is
the property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property laws
and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights
to use such content. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and service
providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use
of any on-line services which may be
accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use
relating to such services. If this SOFTWARE
contains documentation that is provided only
in electronic form, you may print one copy
of such electronic documentation.
526
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge
that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and
European Union export jurisdiction. You
agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as
end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for
the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS, its
parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or
their affiliates or subsidiaries. For product
support, please refer to FORD MOTOR
COMPANY instructions provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE. Should you
have any questions concerning this EULA,
or if you desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please refer
to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT
CORPORATION AND THEIR AFFILIATES
SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR
AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT
IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY
DOLLARS (U.S. $250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or [AIR®]
technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
This [Licensee Product] contains [Adobe®
Flash® Player] [Adobe® AIR®] software under
license from Adobe Systems Incorporated,
Copyright ©1995-2009 Adobe Macromedia
Software LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe,
Flash and AIR are trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated.
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety Information
This system Ford SYNC contains software
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a license
agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized
use of the software from this system in
violation of the license agreement is strictly
prohibited and may subject you to legal
action.
527
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
Read and follow instructions: Before using
your Windows Automotive- based system,
read and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user manual
("User's Guide"). Not following precautions
found in this User's Guide can lead to an
accident or other serious consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept in
the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a ready
reference for you and other users unfamiliar
with the Windows Automotive-based system.
Please make certain that before using the
system for the first time, all persons have
access to the User's Guide and read its
instructions and safety information carefully.
WARNING
Operating certain parts of this system
while driving can distract your attention
away from the road, and possibly cause an
accident or other serious consequences. Do
not change system settings or enter data
non-verbally (using your hands) while driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations. This is
important since while setting up or changing
some functions you might be required to
distract your attention away from the road
and remove your hands from the wheel.
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions within
the Windows Automotive-based system may
be accomplished using only voice
commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system
without removing your hands from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not access
any function requiring a prolonged view of
the screen while you are driving. Pull over in
a safe and legal manner before attempting
to access a function of the system requiring
prolonged attention. Even occasional short
scans to the screen may be hazardous if your
attention has been diverted away from your
driving task at a critical time.
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently a
statistical process which is subject to errors.
It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system
and address any errors.
528
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are intended
to provide turn by turn instructions to get you
to a desired destination. Please make certain
all persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety information
fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation features
may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert
data while driving can seriously distract your
attention and could cause an accident or
other serious consequences. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any navigation
features are provided only as an aid. Make
your driving decisions based on your
observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a
substitute for your personal judgment. Any
route suggestions made by this system
should never replace any local traffic
regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would be
placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would
be directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by
this system may be inaccurate because of
changes in roads, traffic controls or driving
conditions. Always use good judgment and
common sense when following the
suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask
local authorities or an emergency services
operator for these locations. Not all
emergency services such as police, fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be
contained in the map database for such
navigation features.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the Telenav
Software. Your use of the Telenav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the
agreement (“Agreement”) between you and
Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect to the
Telenav Software (including upgrades,
modifications, or additions thereto)
(collectively “Telenav Software”). All
references herein to “you” and “your” means
you, your employees, agents, and
contractors, and any other entity on whose
behalf you accept these terms and
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your
529
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
account information, as well as other
payment and personal information provided
by you to Telenav (directly or through the
use of the Telenav Software, is subject to
Telenav’s privacy policy located at
http://www.telenav.com.
Telenav may revise this Agreement and the
privacy policy at any time, with or without
notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time to
review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the Telenav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the Telenav
Software: (a) observe all traffic laws and
otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own
personal judgment while driving. If you feel
that a route suggested by the Telenav
Software instructs you to perform an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, places you in an unsafe
situation, or directs you into an area that you
consider to be unsafe, do not follow such
instructions; (c) do not input destinations, or
otherwise manipulate the Telenav Software,
unless your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the Telenav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement; (e)
arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the Telenav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your
driving and will not prevent the operation of
any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
harmless against all claims resulting from any
dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use
of the Telenav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the Telenav
Software, to provide Telenav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform Telenav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants to
you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as expressly
permitted below in connection with your
permanent transfer of the Telenav Software
license), without the right to sublicense, to
use the Telenav Software (in object code
form only) in order to access and use the
Telenav Software. This license shall
terminate upon any termination or expiration
of this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the Telenav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes, and
not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
530
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following: (a)
reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble,
translate, modify, alter or otherwise change
the Telenav Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code, audio
library or structure of the Telenav Software
without the prior express written consent of
Telenav; (c) remove from the Telenav
Software, or alter, any of Telenav’s or its
suppliers’ trademarks, trade names, logos,
patent or copyright notices, or other notices
or markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software to
others, except as part of your permanent
transfer of the Telenav Software; or (e) use
the Telenav Software in any manner that (i)
infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party, (ii)
violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or (iii) is harmful, threatening,
abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory,
vulgar, obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the Telenav Software without
advanced written permission of Telenav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to
applicable law, in no event will Telenav, its
licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be liable
for any decision made or action taken by you
or anyone else in reliance on the information
provided by the Telenav Software. Telenav
also does not warrant the accuracy of the
map or other data used for the Telenav
Software. Such data may not always reflect
reality due to, among other things, road
closures, construction, weather, new roads
and other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising out of
your use of the Telenav Software. For
example but without limitation, you agree
not to rely on the Telenav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being or
survival of you or others is dependent on the
accuracy of navigation, as the maps or
functionality of the Telenav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE
AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.
531
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO
YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY
TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS
DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT
YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED
HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL
DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE),
THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV’S SUPPLIERS SHALL
BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY
PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. SOME STATES AND/OR
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the Telenav Software shall be
settled by independent arbitration involving
a neutral arbitrator and administered by the
American Arbitration Association in the
County of Santa Clara, California. The
arbitrator shall apply the Commercial
Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note
that there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the arbitrator
shall be binding upon both parties. You
expressly agree to waive your right to a jury
trial.
This Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its conflict
of laws provisions. To the extent judicial
action is necessary in connection with the
binding arbitration, both Telenav and you
agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction
of the courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations Convention
on Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods shall not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in connection
with your permanent transfer of the Telenav
Software, and expressly conditioned upon
the new user of the Telenav Software
agreeing to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale,
assignment or transfer that is not expressly
permitted under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to Telenav, in which case you
532
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
and all other parties shall immediately cease
all use of the Telenav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav may
assign this Agreement to any other party at
any time without notice, provided the
assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without limitation
all related intellectual property rights. No
licenses or other rights which are not
expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and Telenav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the Telenav Software, you consent
to receive from Telenav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the Telenav Software
(collectively, “Notices”) electronically.
Telenav may provide such Notices by posting
them on Telenav’s Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your
consent to receive Notices electronically,
you must discontinue your use of the Telenav
Software.
8.4
Telenav’s or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party’s right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this Agreement will
remain in full force and effect.
533
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words “include” and “including,” and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words “without
limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and other
data licensed to Telenav by third party
vendors for the benefit of you and other end
users. This Agreement includes end-user
terms applicable to these companies
(included at the end of this Agreement), and
thus your use of the Telenav Software is also
subject to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to Telenav’ s
third party vendor licensors:
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its
licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 20xx. All rights reserved.
534
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
Permitted Use.
You agree to use this Data together with the
Telenav Software solely for the internal
business and personal purposes for which
you were licensed, and not for service
bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions.
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by Telenav, and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not use this Data (a) with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication
with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in communication
with any positioning devices or any mobile
or wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation cellular
phones, palmtop and handheld computers,
pagers, and personal digital assistants or
PDAs.
Warning.
The Data may contain inaccurate or
incomplete information due to the passage
of time, changing circumstances, sources
used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty.
This Data is provided to you “as is,” and you
agree to use it at your own risk. Telenav and
its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability:
TELENAV AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF
ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
535
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN
THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR
BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF
TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and
Countries do not allow certain liability
exclusions or damages limitations, so to that
extent the above may not apply to you.
Export Control.
You shall not export from anywhere any part
of the Data or any direct product thereof
except in compliance with, and with all
licenses and approvals required under,
applicable export laws, rules and regulations,
including but not limited to the laws, rules
and regulations administered by the Office
of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S.
Department of Commerce and the Bureau
of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement.
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between Telenav (and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between us
with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois
[insert “Netherlands” where European HERE
Data is used], without giving effect to (i) its
conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United
Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois [insert
“The Netherlands” where European HERE
Data is used] for any and all disputes, claims
and actions arising from or in connection with
the Data provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users.
If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined at
48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
536
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
accordance with these End-User Terms, and
each copy of Data delivered or otherwise
furnished shall be marked and embedded
as appropriate with the following “Notice of
Use,” and shall be treated in accordance with
such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-
User Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing Data
for the United States shall contain the
following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal Service®
to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.”
“©United States Postal Service® 20XX.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.”
B. Canada Data. The following provisions
apply to the Data for Canada, which may
include or reflect data from third party
licensors (“Third Party Data”), including
Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada
(“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department of
Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is
licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representations
or warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a partic-
ular purpose.
537
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any
claim, demand or action, irrespective
of the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action alleging any loss,
injury or damages, direct or indirect,
which may result from the use or
possession of such Data; or (ii) in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage media
of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the
copy; or (iii) other materials packaged
with the copy, such as user manuals or
end user license agreements: “This data
includes information taken with permis-
sion from Canadian authorities, including
© Her Majesty the Queen in Right of
Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario,
© Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®,
© The Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise
agreed by the parties, in connection with
the provision of any portion of the Data
for the Territory of Canada to End-Users
as may be authorized under the Agree-
ment, Client shall provide such End-
Users, in a reasonably conspicuous
manner, with terms (set forth with other
end user terms required to be provided
under the Agreement, or as otherwise
may be provided, by Client) which shall
include the following provisions on
behalf of the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post and
NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect data
of licensors, including Her Majesty the
Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her
Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department
of Natural Resources Canada
(“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on
an “as is” basis. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, make no guarantees,
representations or warranties
respecting such data, either express
or implied, arising by law or otherwise,
including but not limited to, effective-
ness, completeness, accuracy or
fitness for a particular purpose. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be
liable in respect of any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
538
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which may
result from the use or possession of
the data or the Data. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
data or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and
their officers, employees and agents
from and against any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action, alleging loss, costs, expenses,
damages or injuries (including injuries
resulting in death) arising out of the
use or possession of the data or the
Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addition
to all of the rights and obligations of the
parties under the Agreement. To the
extent that any of the provisions of this
Section are inconsistent with, or conflict
with, any other provisions of the Agree-
ment, the provisions of this Section shall
prevail.
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice: “Fuente:
INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeTerritory
539
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-2011-
01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO
DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian Geographic
Centre”. The foregoing notice
requirement for Jordan Data is
a material term of the Agree-
ment. If Client or any of its
permitted sublicensees (if any)
fail to meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license with
respect to the Jordan Data.
Jordan
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of Jordan
(“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise
Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities
for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan
or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition,
Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any)
and End-Users are restricted from using
the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications
if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity
using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or
(ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications”
shall mean Geomarketing applications,
GIS applications, mobile business asset
management applications, call center
applications, telematics applications,
public organization Internet applications
or for providing geocoding services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and
agrees that in certain countries of the
Europe Territory, Client will need to
obtain rights directly from third party
RDS-TMC code providers to receive and
use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to
deliver to End-Users Transactions in any
way derived from or based on such
Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE
shall deliver the Data incorporating
Traffic Codes to Client only after
receiving certification from Client of its
having obtained such rights.
540
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends
for Belgium. Client shall, for each Trans-
action that uses Traffic Codes for
Belgium, provide the following notice to
the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium
are provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license
granted to Client relating to making,
selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a
map fixed on a paper or paper-like
medium): (a) such license with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain is
conditioned on Client’s entering into and
complying with a separate written agree-
ment with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to
create and sell paper maps, Client’s
paying to the OS any and all applicable
paper map royalties, and Client’s
complying with the OS copyright notice
requirements; (b) such license for selling
or otherwise distributing for charge with
respect to Data for the Territory of Czech
Republic is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining prior written consent from
Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling
or distributing with respect to Data for the
Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on
Client’s obtaining a permit from
Bundesamt für Landestopografie of
Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from
using Data for the Territory of France to
create paper maps with a scale between
1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is
restricted from using any Data to create,
sell or distribute paper maps that are the
same or substantially similar, in terms of
data content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National Land
Survey of Sweden.
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data
for the Territory of Great Britain, Client
acknowledges and agrees that the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct
action against Client to enforce compli-
ance with the OS copyright notice (see
Section IV(D) below) and paper map
requirements (see Section IV(B) above)
contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
“© Bundesamt für Eich- und
Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
541
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten wurden
mit Genehmigung der
zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright and
database right 2010 Contains
Royal Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database right
2010”
Great
Britain
“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-Map
Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è stata
prodotta usando quale riferi-
mento anche cartografia
numerica ed al tratto prodotta
e fornita dalla Regione
Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000; Norwegian
Mapping Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic data ©
National Land Survey
Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische Grundlage: ©
Bundesamt für Landestopo-
graphie.
Switzer-
land
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not received
approvals to distribute map data for the
following countries in such respective
countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan,
Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may
update such list from time to time. The
license rights granted to Client under this
TL with respect to the Data for such
countries are contingent upon Client’s
compliance with all applicable laws and
regulations, including, without limitation,
any required licenses or approvals to
distribute the Application incorporating
such Data in such respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
542
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing RDS-
TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall
contain the following notice: “Product
incorporates traffic location codes which
is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and
its licensors.”
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as
necessary for your personal use to (i) view
it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not
remove any copyright notices that appear
and do not modify the Data in any way. You
agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,
modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse
engineer any portion of this Data, and may
not transfer or distribute it in any form, for
any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication
with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in communication
with any positioning devices or any mobile
or wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation cellular
phones, palmtop and handheld computers,
pagers, and personal digital assistants or
PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if
you fail to comply with these terms and
conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform
substantially in accordance with the
accompanying written materials for a period
of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt,
and (b) any support services provided by
NAV2 shall be substantially as described in
applicable written materials provided to you
by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will
make commercially reasonable efforts to
solve any problem issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with
a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty
543
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
is void if failure of the Data has resulted from
accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any
replacement Data will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period or
thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither
these remedies nor any product support
services offered by NAV2 are available
without proof of purchase from an authorized
international source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET
FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers
and are protected by applicable copyright
and other intellectual property law and
treaties. The Data are provided solely on the
basis of a license to use, not sale.
544
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between us
with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to (i)
its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United
Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder shall be submitted to the
Shanghai International Economic and Trade
Arbitration Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright© 2000-2007 Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents #5,987,525, #6,061,680, #6,154,773,
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207,
#6.240,459, #6,330,593 and other patents
issued or pending. Some services supplied
under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections
set forth herein that are available to
Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from
Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not to
assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or
any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
545
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively,
reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote
Servers and Gracenote Content, including
all ownership rights. Under no circumstances
will either Gracenote become liable for any
payment to you for any information that you
provide, including any copyrighted material
or music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective rights,
collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE
ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
Vehicle with SYNC only
546
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
United States and Mexico
FCC ID: KMHSG1G1
IC: 1422A-SG1G1
Mexico
Model: KMHSG1P1
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
The operation of this equipment is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
equipment or device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this equipment or device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Vehicle with SYNC with Touchscreen/My
Touch
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
547
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Appendices
548
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
3
360 Degree Parking Aid Camera............220
Camera Views.....................................................220
Front Camera.......................................................221
Side Camera........................................................222
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................140
About This Manual............................................7
Protecting the Environment..................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................194
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................194
Accessories...................................................494
Exterior Style........................................................494
Interior Style.........................................................494
Lifestyle.................................................................494
Peace of Mind.....................................................494
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.....12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............224
Active Park Assist........................................209
Deactivating the Active Park Assist
Feature..............................................................215
Parallel Parking, Perpendicular Parking, Park
Out Assist........................................................209
Troubleshooting the System............................215
Adaptive Headlamps.....................................96
Adjusting the Headlamps............................319
Vertical Aim Adjustment....................................319
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................83
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................83
Easy Entry and Exit Feature...............................84
End of Travel Position..........................................84
Memory Feature....................................................84
AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps..................................96
Airbag Disposal...............................................54
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................140
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm............................................81
All-Wheel Drive..............................................188
Ambient Lighting............................................99
Anti-Theft Alarm...............................................81
Arming the Alarm..................................................82
Disarming the Alarm............................................82
Appendices...................................................522
Audible Warnings and Indicators...............113
Headlamps On Warning Chime........................113
Keyless Warning Alert.........................................113
Parking Brake On Warning Chime...................113
Audio Control...................................................84
Seek, Next or Previous........................................84
Audio System................................................388
General Information...........................................388
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD..........................................................389
Auto Hold........................................................197
Using Auto Hold..................................................198
Autolamps........................................................92
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........93
Automatic Climate Control.........................140
Automatic High Beam Control....................95
Activating the System..........................................95
Manually Overriding the System......................96
549
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
Automatic Transmission..............................182
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning............................................................186
Brake-Shift Interlock Override.........................185
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow...................................................................187
Push Button Shift Transmission.......................182
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission.............184
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check.......313
Adding Transmission Fluid ...............................314
Checking the Transmission Fluid Level ........313
Autowipers.......................................................88
Auxiliary Power Points.................................163
110 Volt AC Power Point.....................................163
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................163
Locations...............................................................163
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive...........................................188
B
Blind Spot Information System..................237
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS™) with
Cross Traffic Alert...........................................237
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............302
Booster Seats...................................................27
Types of Booster Seats.......................................27
Brake Fluid Check.........................................315
Brakes..............................................................194
General Information............................................194
Breaking-In....................................................269
Bulb Specification Chart.............................322
C
Cabin Air Filter...............................................143
California Proposition 65................................11
Capacities and Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™....................................................376
Specifications.......................................................377
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.........381
Specifications......................................................383
Capacities and Specifications...................370
Cargo Nets.....................................................249
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................325
Center Console.............................................165
Changing a Bulb............................................321
Headlamp..............................................................321
LED Lamps............................................................321
Changing a Fuse...........................................301
Fuses......................................................................301
Changing a Road Wheel.............................363
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.......................................................364
Stowing the flat tire ...........................................367
Tire Change Procedure....................................365
Changing the 12V Battery...........................316
Changing the Engine Air Filter..................324
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................318
Changing the Rear Window Wiper
Blade..................................................................319
Changing the Windshield Wiper Blades.......318
Checking MyKey System Status.................64
Checking the Wiper Blades........................318
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance...................................................41
Child Safety.......................................................16
General Information..............................................16
Child Safety Locks...........................................31
Left-Hand Side.......................................................32
Right-Hand Side....................................................32
Child Seat Positioning...................................29
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................330
Cleaning Products........................................325
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels..........................331
Cleaning the Engine....................................327
550
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
Cleaning the Exterior..................................325
Exterior Chrome Parts.......................................326
Exterior Plastic Parts..........................................326
Stripes or Graphics............................................326
Underbody...........................................................326
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens...........................330
Cleaning the Interior....................................328
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior..............................................................328
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................327
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................62
Climate............................................................469
Climate Control Voice Commands.................472
Climate Control..............................................140
Climate Controlled Seats............................155
Cooled Seats........................................................156
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................309
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........52
Creating a MyKey............................................61
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings................................................................61
Cruise Control.................................................85
Principle of Operation.......................................223
Type 1.......................................................................85
Type 2......................................................................85
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control................................223
Customer Assistance...................................277
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................10
Service Data Recording.........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps...............................94
Type 1 - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)..........................................94
Type 2 - Configurable..........................................94
Direction Indicators........................................97
Drive Control.................................................246
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL............................246
Driver Alert......................................................231
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION.............................231
USING DRIVER ALERT.......................................231
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................45
Children and Airbags...........................................46
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.........................................................46
Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags..........51
Driving Aids.....................................................231
Driving Hints..................................................269
Driving Through Water................................270
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps...........................94
E
Economical Driving......................................269
Electric Parking Brake..................................195
Applying the Electric Parking brake...............195
Battery With No Charge.....................................197
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake.............196
Emission Control System.............................179
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)........................180
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing................................................................181
End User License Agreement...................522
SYNC End User License Agreement
(EULA)...............................................................522
Engine Block Heater......................................171
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................172
Engine Coolant Check................................309
Adding Engine Coolant.....................................310
Checking the Engine Coolant..........................310
Recycled Engine Coolant...................................311
Severe Climates....................................................311
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling...............................................................311
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................80
551
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
Engine Oil Check.........................................308
Adding Engine Oil..............................................308
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.7L EcoBoost™......307
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.7L...........................308
Engine Specifications - 2.7L
EcoBoost™....................................................370
Drivebelt Routing................................................370
Engine Specifications - 3.7L........................371
Drivebelt Routing.................................................371
Entertainment................................................422
AM/FM Radio.......................................................423
Bluetooth Audio..................................................444
CD...........................................................................438
SD Card Slot and USB Port..............................440
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated)..............431
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information....................................444
Environment......................................................15
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake..............................195
Essential Towing Checks............................264
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................265
Hitches..................................................................264
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)............................................265
Safety Chains......................................................264
Trailer Brakes.......................................................264
Trailer Lamps.......................................................264
When Towing a Trailer......................................265
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options...................................14
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................496
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY).................497
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)............................496
Exterior Mirrors...............................................101
Auto-dimming Feature.......................................103
Auto-Folding Mirrors..........................................102
Blind Spot Information System........................104
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................102
Heated Exterior Mirrors ....................................103
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror.............................103
Lincoln Welcome Mat.........................................103
Memory Mirrors ..................................................103
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................101
Signal Indicator Mirrors .....................................103
F
Fastening the Safety Belts...........................34
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt...................................37
Safety Belt Extension Assembly.......................38
Safety Belt Locking Modes................................35
Using a Sliding Clip..............................................34
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy.............35
Flat Tire Inflation
See: Temporary Mobility Kit.............................336
Floor Mats........................................................271
Front Parking Aid.........................................206
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................207
Front Passenger Sensing System..............46
Fuel and Refueling........................................173
Fuel Consumption.........................................178
Calculating Fuel Economy................................179
Filling the Tank.....................................................178
Fuel Filler Funnel Location..........................175
Fuel Filter.........................................................316
Fuel Quality.....................................................174
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................174
Fuel Shutoff....................................................273
Fuses...............................................................284
Fuse Specification Chart............................284
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel...........295
Power Distribution Box.....................................284
552
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............158
Gauges.............................................................107
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............109
Fuel Gauge...........................................................108
Information Display.............................................108
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................55
Intelligent Access.................................................55
General Maintenance Information...........499
Multi-Point Inspection.......................................502
Owner Checks and Services............................501
Protecting Your Investment.............................499
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?............................499
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?......................................................499
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................280
Getting the Services You Need.................277
Away From Home...............................................277
Global Opening and Closing.......................101
Closing the Windows..........................................101
Opening the Windows........................................101
Glove Box........................................................165
Manual Entry.........................................................165
H
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................273
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................94
Head Restraints.............................................145
Front seat manual head restraints..................146
Rear seat center head restraint.......................147
Rear seat outboard head restraints................147
Heated Seats..................................................154
Front Seats............................................................154
Rear Seats.............................................................155
Heated Steering Wheel................................86
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................143
Heated Exterior Mirror.......................................143
Heated Rear Window.........................................143
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................140
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................142
Cooling the Interior Quickly..............................143
General Hints........................................................142
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................142
Recommended Settings for Cooling .............143
Recommended Settings for Heating..............142
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................143
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................194
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............302
I
In California (U.S. Only)...............................278
Information Display Control.........................85
Cluster Display Control Features.....................85
Information Displays......................................114
General Information.............................................114
Information.....................................................455
911 Assist...............................................................464
Alerts......................................................................464
Calendar...............................................................464
Sirius Travel Link.................................................462
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States
Only)..................................................................456
Vehicle Health Report.......................................467
553
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
Information Messages..................................121
Active Park.............................................................121
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................122
AdvanceTrac™.......................................................123
Airbag.....................................................................123
Alarm......................................................................123
Automatic Engine Shutdown............................124
AWD........................................................................124
Battery and Charging System..........................125
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert
System...............................................................126
Collision Warning System..................................127
Doors and Locks..................................................127
Driver Alert............................................................128
Fuel.........................................................................128
Hill Start Assist.....................................................129
Keys and Intelligent Access.............................129
Lane Keeping System........................................130
Maintenance..........................................................131
MyKey.....................................................................132
Park Aid..................................................................133
Park Brake.............................................................133
Power Steering.....................................................134
Remote Start.........................................................135
Seats.......................................................................135
Starting System ...................................................135
Tire Pressure Monitoring System....................136
Traction Control...................................................136
Transmission.....................................................137
Installing Child Seats......................................18
Child Seats...............................................................18
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts............................18
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).............................................24
Using Tether Straps..............................................25
Instrument Cluster.........................................107
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................93
Interior Lamps..................................................97
Front Interior Lamp...............................................98
Rear Interior Lamp................................................99
Interior Mirror.................................................104
Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................104
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................274
Connecting the Jumper Cables......................275
Jump Starting......................................................275
Preparing Your Vehicle......................................274
Removing the Jumper Cables.........................276
K
Keyless Entry....................................................76
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad.............76
Keyless Starting.............................................167
Ignition Modes......................................................167
Keys and Remote Controls..........................55
L
Lane Keeping System.................................232
Switching the System On and Off..................233
Lighting Control................................................91
Headlamp Flasher................................................92
High Beams............................................................92
Lighting...............................................................91
General Information..............................................91
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services......12
Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers................251
Load Carrying................................................249
Load Limit........................................................251
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................260
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................251
554
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
Locking and Unlocking..................................67
Activating Intelligent Access.............................69
Autolock..................................................................70
Auto Relock............................................................70
Autounlock.............................................................70
Battery Saver...........................................................71
Illuminated Entry.....................................................71
Illuminated Exit........................................................71
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade...........................................................68
Power Door Locks................................................67
Remote Control.....................................................67
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys.....................................................................70
Locks..................................................................67
Luggage Covers...........................................250
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................363
M
Maintenance..................................................302
General Information...........................................302
Manual Liftgate.................................................71
Closing the Liftgate..............................................72
Opening the Liftgate............................................72
Media Hub.......................................................391
Memory Function...........................................151
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................153
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob.......152
Saving a PreSet Position...................................152
Message Center
See: Information Displays..................................114
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors.................143
See: Windows and Mirrors................................100
Mobile Communications Equipment...........14
Moonroof.........................................................105
Bounce-Back........................................................106
Opening and Closing the Moonroof..............106
Motorcraft Parts - 2.7L EcoBoost™............372
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L.................................373
MyKey Troubleshooting................................65
MyKey™..............................................................60
Principle of Operation.........................................60
MyLincoln Touch™.........................................392
General Information...........................................392
MyLincoln Touch™ Troubleshooting.........486
N
Navigation......................................................473
cityseekr................................................................476
Destination Mode...............................................473
Map Mode.............................................................481
Navigation Map Updates.................................485
Navigation Voice Commands..........................485
Point of Interest (POI) Categories...................475
Quick-touch Buttons..........................................484
Setting Your Navigation Preferences............477
Normal Scheduled Maintenance.............503
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™.............................503
Normal Maintenance Intervals........................505
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................309
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................308
Opening and Closing the Hood...............302
Closing the Hood...............................................303
Opening the Hood.............................................302
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................282
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual............282
Overhead Console.......................................166
555
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
P
Parking Aids..................................................205
Principle of Operation.......................................205
Passive Anti-Theft System............................80
SecuriLock®............................................................80
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................80
Perchlorate........................................................12
Personal Safety System™..............................43
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................43
Phone..............................................................445
Making Calls........................................................448
Pairing Subsequent Cell Phones....................447
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time...................................................................446
Phone Menu Options........................................449
Phone Settings....................................................453
Phone Voice Commands..................................454
Receiving Calls....................................................449
Text Messaging....................................................451
Post-Crash Alert System.............................276
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking..............................67
Power Liftgate..................................................73
Hands-Free Feature.............................................76
Obstacle Detection...............................................75
Opening and Closing the Liftgate.....................73
Setting the Liftgate Open Height......................75
Stopping the Liftgate Movement......................75
Power Seats....................................................148
Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active Motion
.............................................................................150
Power Lumbar......................................................150
Power Windows.............................................100
Accessory Delay...................................................101
Bounce-Back........................................................100
One-Touch Down................................................100
One-Touch Up......................................................100
Window Lock.........................................................101
Pre-Collision Assist......................................243
Using the Pre-Collision Assist System..........244
Protecting the Environment..........................15
R
Rear Parking Aid...........................................206
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................206
Rear Seat Armrest.........................................157
Rear Seats.......................................................153
Adjusting the Rear Seats...................................153
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................249
Cargo Management System............................249
In-floor storage - second row..........................249
Rear View Camera........................................217
Using the Rear View Camera System............217
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera.....................................217
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............89
Rear Window Washer..........................................90
Rear Window Wiper.............................................89
Recommended Towing Weights..............262
Reduced Engine Performance..................269
Refueling..........................................................176
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System.....................177
Remote Control...............................................56
Car Finder...............................................................57
Intelligent Access Key.........................................56
Memory Feature....................................................59
Remote Start...........................................................57
Replacing the Battery..........................................56
Sounding a Panic Alarm......................................57
Remote Start...................................................144
Automatic Settings..............................................144
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..................331
556
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Collision Repairs.....................................................13
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.........................13
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................59
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................283
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)......282
Roadside Assistance...................................272
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................273
Vehicles Sold In Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................273
Vehicles Sold In the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance.....................................272
Vehicles Sold In the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance.....................................272
Roadside Emergencies...............................272
Roof Racks and Load Carriers...................251
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................269
Running Out of Fuel......................................175
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container...........................................................175
Filling a Portable Fuel Container.....................175
S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment....................38
Safety Belt Minder..........................................40
Belt-Minder™...........................................................40
Safety Belts.......................................................33
Principle of Operation..........................................33
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................39
Conditions of operation......................................39
Safety Canopy™................................................51
Safety Precautions........................................173
Scheduled Maintenance Record................511
Scheduled Maintenance............................499
Seats.................................................................145
Security.............................................................80
Settings...........................................................403
Clock......................................................................403
Display...................................................................404
Settings..................................................................410
Sound....................................................................406
Vehicle...................................................................407
Side Airbags.....................................................50
Side Sensing System...................................207
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................208
Sitting in the Correct Position....................145
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains..................................358
Special Notices.................................................13
New Vehicle Limited Warranty...........................13
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...........................13
Special Instructions...............................................13
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................507
Exceptions.............................................................510
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control............................................223
Stability Control............................................202
Principle of Operation.......................................202
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................168
Automatic Engine Shutdown............................170
Failure to Start......................................................169
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes....................171
Important Ventilating Information.....................171
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................170
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................170
Vehicles with Keyless Start...............................168
Starting and Stopping the Engine.............167
General Information............................................167
Steering..........................................................242
Electric Power Steering....................................242
Steering Wheel................................................83
Storage Compartments...............................165
557
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.....................................................105
Sun Visors.......................................................105
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................105
Supplementary Restraints System.............44
Principle of Operation..........................................44
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
T
Tailgate
See: Manual Liftgate..............................................71
See: Power Liftgate..............................................73
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications...............370
Temporary Mobility Kit................................336
First Stage: Inflating the Tire with Sealing
Compound and Air........................................338
General Information...........................................336
Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure.......340
Tips for Use of the Kit........................................337
What to Do After the Tire has Been
Sealed................................................................341
What to do When a Tire Is Punctured...........338
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)..........................279
Tire Care.........................................................342
Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................345
Important Information About Low-Profile
Tires...................................................................342
Important Information About Sport Tires and
Wheels..............................................................343
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................344
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................346
Notice to Crossover Vehicle Owners............343
Temperature A B C.............................................345
Tire Rotation.........................................................357
Traction AA A B C...............................................345
Treadwear.............................................................344
Tire Inflation When Punctured
See: Temporary Mobility Kit.............................336
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............359
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System........................................360
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System ..............................................................361
Tire Repair Kit
See: Temporary Mobility Kit.............................336
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................334
Towing a Trailer..............................................261
Load Placement...................................................261
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels........267
Emergency Towing.............................................267
Recreational Towing..........................................267
Towing..............................................................261
Traction Control............................................200
Principle of Operation.......................................200
Trailer Sway Control....................................262
Transmission Code Designation...............375
Transmission...................................................182
Transmission
See: Transmission...............................................182
Transporting the Vehicle............................266
U
Under Hood Overview - 2.7L
EcoBoost™....................................................304
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L....................306
Engine Shield.......................................................307
Universal Garage Door Opener................158
HomeLink Wireless Control System...............158
558
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................224
Blocked Sensor..................................................229
Changing the Set Speed..................................227
Detection Issues.................................................228
Disengaging the System..................................227
Following a Vehicle...........................................225
Hilly Condition Usage........................................227
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation..............227
Overriding the System......................................227
Resuming the Set Speed..................................227
Setting a Speed..................................................225
Setting the Gap Distance.................................226
Switching the System Off.................................228
Switching the System On.................................224
Switching to Normal Cruise Control..............230
System Not Available........................................229
Using All-Wheel Drive..................................188
Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel
Drive (AWD)......................................................188
Using Cruise Control...................................223
Switching Cruise Control Off...........................224
Switching Cruise Control On...........................223
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................65
Using Snow Chains......................................358
Using Stability Control................................204
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
(RSC®)...............................................................204
Using Summer Tires....................................358
Using Traction Control................................200
Switching the System Off.................................200
System Indicator Lights and Messages.......200
Using a Switch....................................................200
Using the Information Display Controls.......200
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only).............................................280
V
Vehicle Care..................................................325
General Information...........................................325
Vehicle Certification Label.........................374
Vehicle Identification Number...................374
Vehicle Storage............................................332
Battery...................................................................333
Body.......................................................................332
Brakes....................................................................333
Cooling system...................................................333
Engine...................................................................332
Fuel system..........................................................332
General..................................................................332
Miscellaneous......................................................333
Removing Vehicle From Storage....................333
Tires.......................................................................333
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................140
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...............374
Voice Control...................................................85
559
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................109
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................109
Anti-Lock Braking System.................................109
Autohold Active...................................................109
Autohold Unavailable........................................109
Automatic High Beam Control.........................109
Battery.....................................................................110
Blind Spot Monitor...............................................110
Brake System........................................................110
Cruise Control.......................................................110
Direction Indicator................................................110
Door Ajar................................................................110
Electric Park Brake...............................................110
Engine Coolant Temperature............................110
Engine Oil................................................................111
Fasten Safety Belt.................................................111
Front Airbag............................................................111
Heads Up Display..................................................111
High Beam...............................................................111
Hood Ajar................................................................111
Liftgate Ajar.............................................................111
Low Beam Malfunction Warning........................111
Low Fuel Level.......................................................111
Low Tire Pressure Warning.................................111
Low Washer Fluid.................................................112
Parking Lamps.......................................................112
Powertrain Fault...............................................112
Service Engine Soon...........................................112
Stability Control.....................................................112
Stability Control Off..............................................113
Washer Fluid Check......................................315
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................325
See: Wipers and Washers...................................87
Waxing............................................................326
Welcome Lighting...........................................97
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................363
Wheels and Tires..........................................334
General Information...........................................334
Technical Specifications...................................368
Windows and Mirrors...................................100
Windshield Washers......................................89
Front Camera Washer..........................................89
Windshield Wipers..........................................87
Intermittent Wipe...................................................87
Speed Dependent Wipers..................................87
Wipers and Washers......................................87
Wrecker Towing
See: Transporting the Vehicle.........................266
560
MKX (CD9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, ASO/OGC Review
Index
